Toshiba 46HM94 DLP Television Owner's Manual

Toshiba 46HM94 DLP Television Owner's Manual | Manualzz

TOSHIBA

HM94(E)O02-04

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV. This manuaHwflH heHpyou use the many exciting features of your new TV.

Before operating the TV, please read this manual completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.

Safety Precautions

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF FiRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK,

DO

NOT EXPOSE

THiS APPLIANCE

TO RAiN OR

MOISTURE°

WARNmNG: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRmC $ROCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR RACK),NO USER-

QUALiFiEDSERVICEPERSORREL,Thisappliesto al! items exceptthese specifiedonpages98-100ef this

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (:servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance,

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE!

/_

The temperature of the mamp

!_,J_

irereediately after ase exceeds

392°F (20O°C}°

Touching

the

/ ff

_

_

'_ tamp before it has cooled wmmlresumtin severe bums° ALLOW

\

THE LAMP TO COOL FOB AT LEAST ONE (m)HOUR BEFORE

REPLACINGIT.

The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The length of service life varies depending on product use and user settings.

If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should rephce the lamp unit; and

. the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp wifl be reduced and the lamp may rupture.

If the lamp raptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is repIaced.

Note:

The brnp unit is designed

so broken !amp gbss

remains secure/y inside the/arnp

uni_

See "Larep unit

repiaeereent

amJ care" on pages 98-100.

• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area,

NOte: The lamp unit contains memu_%

Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities ol the Electronic

Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

2

/

o

HOTE: NEVEH CONHECT THiS

TO

A PEHSONAL COMPUTEH (PC).

', THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WlTH A PC.

N_iCE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND iNSTABiLiTY

CAUTION: This temevision is for use

onmy

with the Toshiba stand misted bemowo Use with other carts or stands is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury.

Television Stand Model

46H M94

52HM94

ST4694, ST4684

ST5294, ST5284

62H M94 ST6294, ST6284 h_ Canada, please contact your authorized Toshiba dealer or visit the Toshiba Canada web site at www.toshiba.ca

to determine the appropriate stand re1 your television.

NOTE TO CATV iNSTALLERS IN THE UoSoAo

This is a reminder to call the CATV system mstaller's attention to Article

820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical For additional antenna grounding mformatioe, see items 27 and 28 orb page 4.

ChiM

Safety

Jt Makes A Differeuce

Where Your TV Stauds

Congratulations on your purchase!

As you enjoy your new TV, keep these safety tips in reind:

The Issue

© If you are like most consumers,you have a Tt/in your home.Many homes, in fact, have morethan oneTV,

© Tile hometheater entertahlmentexperience is a growingtrend, and Larger

T_s ate popuhr purchases however,they are not alwayssupported on the properTV stands.

© SometimesT_s are improperlysecuredor inappropriately situated on dressers,bookcases,shelves,desks, audio speakers, chests, or carts. As a result,TVsmayfail over,caushlg unnecessal7 injury,

We Care!

© Tile consumerelectronicsindustry is committed to makinghome entertainmentenjoyableand safe.

© The ConsumerElectronicsAssociationformed the pport SafetyCommittee,comprised of TV and consumerelectronicsfurniture manufacturers,to advocatechildren's safety and educateconsumersand their families about televisionsafety.

Tune into Safety

© One sizedoes NOTfit all! Use appropriatefurnkure largeenough to support the weight of your TV (and other electroniccomponents).

© Useappropriateangle braces,straps,and anchorsto secureyour furniture to the wal! (but neverscrew any[hingdirectly into the TV).

© Carefullyread and understand the other enclosedinstructionsfor proper use of this product.

© Do not allow children to climb on or playwith furniture and TVs.

© Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR,renlotecontrol, or toy] that a curiouschild may reachfor.

© Rememberthat children can become excitedwhile watching a prog_anl and can potentiallypush or puff a TV over.

© Shareour safetyulessageabout this hidden hazardof the llome with your family and friends. Thank you!

2500 Wilson BIvd

Arlington, VA 22201 U.SA

1el 703_907-7600 Fax703-907-7690 www.CE,org

CEAis the Sponsol: Pmducer and

Managerof rile Intem:lrion:lrOES_

2

÷

10/27/04, 3:51 PM

÷

F

HM94(E)002-04

[mportant Safety [nstructions

0

Read these

instructions.

2]

Keep these

instructions.

s]

Heed aH warnings.

4]

Follow all instructions.

5]

Do not use this apparatus near water.

6]

Clean only with a dry cloth.

7]

Do not block any ventilation openings.

Insta[I in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not install near any beat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9] Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has

Wideplug two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety'.

If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consuk an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outiet.

10] Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at pIugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where it exits the apparatus.

11 ) Only use attachments/accessories manufacturer.

specified by the

12) Use onmy with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13] Unplug this apparatus during [ightnhlg storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14] Refer aH servicing to qualified service personnel

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-suppIy cord or pIug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. This applies to a[[ items except those specified on pages 98-100 of this manual.

15)

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of etectric shock, do not use the poIarized piug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the bIades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure.

16)

WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project the picture, and requires special safety precautions:

° See pages 98-100 for instructions on [amp unit replacement and care.

o DO NOT attempt to service this product

except

as specified on pages 98-100.

The only user-serviceable item in this product is the [amp unK.

hlstallation, Care, and Service

installation

Foilow these recommendations and precautions and heed all warnings when installing your TV:

17] Never modify' this equipment.

Changes or modifications may void: a) the warranty', and b) the user's authority to operate this equipment under the mles of the Federal

Communications Commission.

18)

DANGER: RiSK OF SERmOUS PERSONAL raNJURY, DEATH, OR EQUmPMENT

DAMAGE. _Never place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV may fail, causing serious personal injury, death, or sedous damage to the TV.

19] Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).

20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.

21] Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled with liquid, or candies on top of the TV.

22] Always place the back of the television at least one (1] inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to allow proper ventilation.

23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:

* on a bed, sofa, rag, or similar surface;

, too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or

* in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet, or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.

24] Never allow anything to rest on or rotI over the power cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is subject to wear or abuse.

25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power source only.

(conlinued on next padej

3

÷

3

8/30/04,10:58 AM

÷

F

HM94(E)O8

4

-04 hlatallatioll (bontinued frem previous page.1

27] Always make sure the antenna system is properly

28] grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the

National Electric Code].

Electricservice equbment ..

DANGER: RiSK OF SERmOUS

PERSONAL

raN OR DEATH!

Use extreme care to make sure you are never in a position where your body (or any item you are in contact with, such as a ladder or screwdriveO can accidentally touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.

o Never attempt to install any of the following during

lightning activity: a] an antenna system; or b] cables, wires, or any home theater component connected to an antenna or phone system.

Care

Ground clamps j Antenna leadqrt wire collductors

(NECSection 810-21)

• _-"_

_Powel service grounding electrode system (NECAR 250 Part H)

For better performance and safer operation of your TOSH I BA

TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

Care

(continued from previous column)

33} For added protection of your TV from lightning and power surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.

34} During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the unit is being turned on or of[ If these sounds become frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

35} Special care for

DLP T_

(digital light processing[ units:

Lamp-The lamp in this product has a limited service life.

The length of service life varies depending on product use or user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

- you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should replace the lamp unit; and

- the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is replaced.

See "Lamp unit replacement and care" on pages 98-100.

Note:

, The lamp unit is designed

so broken lamp glass remains

securely inside the lamp unit.

The lamp unit contains memury

Disposal of mercury

may be regulated due to environmental

considerations.

For disposal or recycling

information, please contact

your local authorities

or

the Electronle

Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

o Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved

method for yotf! area.

29] Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove the source of reflections while viewing the TV.

30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry' cloth.

Do not spray volatile compounds such as insecticide on the cabinet. This may cause a discoloration or damage of the cabinet.

30

WARI_mNG: RmSK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into the TV cabinet slots.

32] If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when the TV is first delivered}, condensation may form on the

lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to

7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.

Sewice

36}

WARNING:

RiSK OF ELECTR|C SHOCK!

Never attempt to service the TV yourself, except as specified on pages 98-100.

Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow tMs

WARN I NG may result in death or serious injuly. Refer atI servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized

Service Center.

37} If you have the TV serviced:

Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts specified by the manufacturer:

Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.

38} When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.

Note: The lamp unit contains memury. Disposal of memury may

be regulated due lo environmental

condderadons.

Dispose of

the used lamp unit by the approved method

for your area.

For disposa! or recycling infbmTation, please contact your local

autho/:ities or the Electronic

Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

÷

4

÷

8/30/04,10:58 AM

[

A

÷ [

The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may become dark or black, or the lamp may fail, at which time you must replace the lamp unit. See "Lamp unit replacement and care" on pages 98-100.

2)

Each time you turn on the TV, it may take severa! seconds to go from no picture to full picture brightness.

S)

The display on this TV is manufactured using a chip that may contain Lipto 1.3 million microscopic mirrors. Each of these micromirrors measures less than one-fifth the width of a human hair and represents a single pixel on the television display.

These micromirrors are nmtmted on tiny hinges that enable them to titlt either toward the light source [ON) or away from it (OFF). Occasionally, one of these mirrors may become inoperative, creating a light or dark pixel on the projection surface. This is a structural property of DLP TMprojection TV technology, and is not a sign of malfunction.

Such pixels are not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance (see item 29 on page 4).

4)

Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a "rainbow effect" on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this type, and is not a sign of TV malfunction.

5) Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and as directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be affected by your viewing position and Length of viewing time. If you sit too closely to the TV for too Long,you may stiffer from eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.

This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the intema!

temperature.

You may be able to hear the fans for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a function of the Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown mode and is not a sign of TV malfunction.

You can set the Quick Restart feature to stop the fans as soon as the TV is turned off See

"SeLecting the Quick Restart feature" on page 50.

7) The green and red LED Lights on the contro! touchpad (on the lower right corner of the TV screen) indicate your TV's current status. If either light flashes, see "LED indications" on page 94 for details.

8) Review all safety and operating information in this owner's mantra[ before you use your TV.

The DLP logo and DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

Important Safety Information .............................................2=4

Important notes about yoar BLP projection TV .................5

Chapter 1: hRrodtmtion ..........................................................7

Welcome to Toshiba ...........................................................

7

Features o_'your newTV ....................................................

7

Overview of steps ['or insrMlilng, setting up, and

using yo_r new TV ......................................................

8

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ............................................9

TV front touchpad andsidepanelcontrols and connections .............................................................

9

TV back pand connections ................................................

10

Overview of cable types ......................................................

11

About the connection illustrations ......................................

12

Connecting a digital CableCARD'".

...................................

12

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV

(no Cable box) ...............................................................

13

Connecting a camcorder .....................................................

13

Com_ecfing a VCR and Cable box .....................................

14

Connecting a VCR and sate[lke receiver .............................

15

Com_ecting a DVD player with Swideo, a VCR, and a CabLebox ..............................................................

16

Connecting a DVD player with Co[orStreamv'

(component video) and a VCR .......................................

17

Connecting two VCRs

.......................................................

18

Connecting an HDMI _" or a DVI device to d_e

HDMI input

..................................................................

19

Connecting a digital audio system

......................................

20

Connecting an analog audio system ....................................

20

ControLling infrared remote-controlLed devices through tile TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 21

Con netting IEEE- 1394 video devices ................................. 22

Using analog-compatibLe IEEE-1394 devices .................. 22

Supported signals ...........................................................

22

Using TheaterNet on-screen device control .................... 22

Connecting an AVHD or D-VHS recorder .................... 23

IEEE-1394 device initialization ...................................... 23

IEEE-1394 device management ..................................... 24

G-LINK _''connection ........................................................

25

Chapter

3: Using the remote control .................................

26

Learning abotJt the remote controL .....................................

26

Installing the remote control batteries .................................

27

Using the remote control MODE button to control your other dexices ...........................................................

Remote Control flmcdona[ key chart .................................

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices ...........................................................

Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................

27

28

3(1

32

Chapter

4: Nenu tayoat and navigation ...........................

34

Main menu Layout ..............................................................

34

Setup/Instalhtion menu hyout ...........................................

35

Navigating the menu system ...............................................

35

Chapter

5: TV Gaide On Screen

TM system setup ............. 36

TV Guide On Screen reminder ..........................................

39

Chapter 6: Setting ap year TV .............................................40

Selecting the menu language ...............................................

40

Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 4(1

Dogramming channels into the TV's channd memory ....... 41

Progranlming channels automatically .......................... 41

ManualLyadding and deLetingchannels in the dlanne[ memory .....................................................

42

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ION, All rights reserved.

5

÷

A

÷ L

Programming your fhvorite channeh .................................. 45

Setting up and using TheaterNet

TM on screen device control .................................................................

44

Setting up TheaterNet .................................................

44

Using the TheaterNet control icons ............................. 45

TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 46 48

Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 49

Setting the HDMF" audio mode ........................................ 49

Setting the time and date ....................................................

49

Viewing tile CableCARI_)

TM menu ...................................... 50

Setting the Quick Restart feature ........................................ 50

Viewing the digital signal meter .........................................

51

Viewing the system status ...................................................

51

Chapter 7: Using the

IV

Guide On Screen

TM interactive program guide ...............................................

52

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system ....................... 52

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system ...................... 53

TV Guide On Screen remote control functions .......... 53

Video Window ...........................................................

54

Panel Menus ...............................................................

54 hffo Box......................................................................

55

TV Guide On Screen ]cons .........................................

55

TV Guide On Screen Services ............................................

56

LISTINGS screen .......................................................

56

SEARCH screen ..........................................................

57

RECORDINGS screen ...............................................

59

SCHEDULE screen ....................................................

60

Record fbatures ...........................................................

60

Remind fbatures ..........................................................

62

SETUP screen .............................................................

64

Change system settings ..........................................

64

Change channel display .........................................

64

Change def'au[t options ..........................................

65

Chapter g:

Using the gV's features .................................... 66

Selecting the video input source to view

.............................

66

Labeling the video input sources .........................................

67

Tuning channds .................................................................

68

Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 68

Using SpeedSurf to change to a specific programmed channel ..............................................

68

Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or unprogrammed) ......................................................

68

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return ......................................................

68

Switching between two channels using

SurfLock". ..............................................................

68

Selecting the picture size .....................................................

69

Natural picture size .....................................................

69

TheaterWide °_'1 picture size ........................................ 70

TheaterWide °_'2 picture size ........................................ 70

TheaterWide °_'3 picture size ........................................ 70

Full picture size ...........................................................

70

Scrolling the TheaterWide ')picture .................................... 71

Using the auto aspect ratio _bature ...................................... 71

Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 72

Selecting the hmp mode ....................................................

72

Using the POP f'eatures ......................................................

73

Using the POP double-window f'eatm:e....................... 75

6

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORAXION.

All rights reserved,

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 74

Freezing the main picture in the

POP double-window ..............................................

74

POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 75

Using the favorite channeI scan })ature ........................ 75

Adjusting the picture ..........................................................

76

Sdecting the picture mode ..........................................

76

Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 76

Resetting the picture settings ....................................... 76

Using CableC[ear

TM

DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 77

Sdecting the color temperature ................................... 77

Resetting the advanced picture settings ....................... 77

Using the closed caption mode ...........................................

78

Advanced closed captions ............................................

78

Digital closed captions ................................................

78

Adiusting the audio ............................................................

79

Muting the sound .......................................................

79

Digital audio selector ..................................................

79

Sdecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 79

Adjusting the audio quality .........................................

80

Using the StableSound

TM f'eature .................................. 80

Resetting your audio adjustments ................................ 80

Turning offthe built-in speakers ................................. 81

SeJecting the optical audio output f'ormat ................... 81

Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player .............................................................................

82

Memmy card specifications .........................................

82

Using the IPEG picture viewer .................................... 85

Using the MP3 audio phyer ....................................... 84

Memory card care and handling .................................. 85

Using the Game Mode feature ............................................

85

Setting the ON/OFF timer ................................................

86

Setting the sleep timer ........................................................

86

Displaying TV setting infbrmation on-screen ..................... 87

Understanding the auto power offfeature ........................... 87

Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 87

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ......................................

88

Entering the PIN code .......................................................

88

If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 88

Changing your PIN code ...................................................

88

Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (\7-Chip) ......... 89

Blocking channds ...............................................................

90

Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 9{}

Locking video inputs ..........................................................

9{)

Using the GameTimer

TM

.....................................................

91

Using the front pane[ lock _)atm:e....................................... 91

Chapter 10: TrouMeshooting ...............................................

92

General troubleshooting .....................................................

92

LED indications .................................................................

94

TV Guide On Screen FAQs ......................................... 95 97

Chapter 11: Appendix ...........................................................

98

Lamp unit replacement ..............................................

98 100

Specifications ...................................................................

lO1

Limited United States _._rranty .......................................

102

Limited Canada "g}qu:ranty 103

HM94(E)O0. _06(Notes&TOC) 6 _ 8/30/04,1:01 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

Welcometo Toshiba

Thank you fbr purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most irmovafive DLP _'_'projecdoo TVs on the market. The goal of this rnanual is to guide you through setting up md oper _fing your TV as quickly as possible

, This manual applies to modeIs 46HM94, 52HM94, md 62HM94. Befbre you start reading, check d_e modal number on d_e back of your TV.

Instructions in this manuaI are based

on

using the remote control You _lso can use the contro[s on the TV front toud_pad if they have the same name as those refbrred to on d_e remote control

The side pand and back pand provide termina[s fbr connecting od_er equipment to your TM See page 9 fbr f'ront touchpad and side pand details. See page 10 fbr back pand derails, See pages 12-25 fbr insmtcdons on connecting od_er devices to your TV.

Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefuJly_ and keep this manual for futt_e reference.

Featuresof your new TV

The fbHowing are just a fbw oldie many excking fbamres of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP projection TV:

Integrated digital tuning (SVSB ATSC and QRM) eIiminates the need f'or a separate digkal converter set-top box (in most cases).

° $V Guide On Screen °_'no-}'eeinteractive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).

° Digital CableCARD '_' module skit f'or viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 12).

° Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digkal recording device or a ]bshiba Symbio'" 160HD4 Andio/Video Hard Drive

Recorder m one of'the IEEE-1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definkion material tCromeither tuner (page 23).

(page 83) and _br playing MP3 files (page 84).

° TheaterNet'' icons fi_r(m-screen control (if'external iR and iEEE=1394 devices (page 44).

• Two mE[[-1394 ports }i_rmulti-device cormection and control

(page 22).

• HDNm/DVI digka[, high-definition multimedia inter_ce (page 19).

Two sets of ColorStream °'_HD high-reso[ufion cornponent video inputs (pages 15 and 17).

• Doiby _ Digital* (page 2(t) and

SRS'"

WOW (page 81) audio technologies.

• DigitN Audio Out optical audio connection (page 20),

• Game Node feature for shorter frame de_ayswhen p_aying high-action video Barnes (page 85).

CaMeCmear*MDNR digital pica*re noise reduction (page 77).

• Double-window POP (page 73) and muLl-window Favorites (page 75) features.

In the United States. TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemslar TV Guide international, inc. and/er one of its affiliates, In Canada, -[V GUIDE is a regislered mark of Transcontinental inc., and is (ised under license by Gemslar TV Guide International. Inc. ]be TV Guide On Screen system is mal_utactured under license frent Gemstar TV Guide

International. Inc and/or one of its affiliales. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more d the following issued United Stales patel/ts: 6,498,895, 6.418.556, 6,331,877,

6,239,794, 6,154,203, 5,940.073.4.908.713. 4.751.578. 4.706.121,

IND. AND!OR ITS RELATEDAFFIUATESAND/OR TOSHmBAANERmDA CONSUNER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.ARE NOT

PROVIDED BY THE iV GUIDE ON SCREENSYSTEN. IN NO

° A recordingdeviceis requffsdfor recording.Over<heair or cableaccessto stationscarryingTB GuideOn Screendatais req_[redfor the TVGuideOn Screensyslemto operate,TV

°This productincorporatescopyrightpretecfiontechnologythatis proLectedbyUS, patentsand otherintelleclualprepedyrights.Useofthis copyrightprotectiontechnologymustbe authorizedbyMacrevisionand is intendedfor homeandother limitedpay per view usesonly.unlessotherwiseauthorizedby MacrevisionReverseengineeringor disassemblyis p_shibited.

° SRSWOW,SRSandthe(@) logo aretrademarksd SRSLabs.Inc, SRSWOWtechnologyis incorporatedunderlicensefrvm]SRSLabs.Inc

° *ManufacluredunderlicensefremDolbyLaboratoriesDolbyandthe double-Dlogo areregisteredtrademarksof DolbyLaboratories,

° SmartMediais a registeredtlademarkofPosNbaCorporagon

, SDis a trademarkd SDCardAssociation

, MemoryStick is a trademarkd SonyCorporation

Copyright O 2004 "FOSH[BA CORPOR_J[ON, All rights reserved.

7

8/30/O4, 1:41 PM

HM94(E/OO7-O8(1-1ntro) 7

[

÷

Overview of steps for instNJing,setting up, and using your new TV

Follow these steps to set up your TV md begin using its mmy exciting features.

1 Carefully read the important safety, installation, care, and service information on pages 2-5. Keep this manual for future reference.

2. Observe the following wben cboosing a location for tbe TV:

° Place the TV on the floor or on the optiona! TV stand listed in the "Specifications" section (page 101]=

NOTIC[

OF

P0$$1BL[_ N'A_II}NENNLITY

BANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY

OR [)EATR! Usethis TV only with the TOSHIBA TV stand listed in the "Specifications" section _age 101). Use with other stands may result in instability, causing possible injury or death.

12 See "Menu layout and navigation" for a quick overview of navigating the TV's menu structure (pages 34 35).

13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen _ system (if avaibble in your area).

Note: The TV Guide Ol_Screen pregrara guide opens automatically

when you turo ol_ the Tg

Todisable this feature:

75 PressTV GUIDE of?the remote eontml t_ oper_dye7//

2j Usethe _ _ buttons t(?selectthe SETUPmenu

3_ Usethe ,AT buttons t_ sdect CHANGEDEFAULT

° Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the screen.

. Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow ploper ventilation, hadequate ventilation may cause ovelheating, which will damage the TV.THiS TYPE OF

DAMAGE iS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA

WARRANTY.

o Read "ff_stallatiorPon pages 3 4.

. Read "Important notes about your DLP TV" on page 5

3.

Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have cor_nectedall cables and devices to your TV.

4_

BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, meal the functions of the TV's connections and controls (pages 9 and 10)

5_

Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV

(pages 12 25).

6_

Connect the G-LiNK

TM cable (either one of the enclosed

I R blaster cables) fl-omyour VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable) to the G LINK jack so you carl use the TV Guide On Screen_ features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 25.

7

h_stamm

in the remote control (page 27).

8

See "Learnh_g about the remote control" (page 26) for an overview of the buttons on the remote control

9

Program the remote control to operate your other device(s:} (pages 27 33).

10.

AFTER connecting all cables and devices, power cords for your TV and other devices.

plug

ill the

11.

After you plug in the TV power cord, the green LED (on the TV front touchpad, to the lett of the POWER button) will blink 3 times. \/V_itabout 30 seconds until the green LED lights continuously arid then press POWER on the TV front touchpad or remote control

See "LEDindications" on page 94.

4) Usethe _,_' buttons t_)sdect GENEML DEFAULT

0P770,_ and thenpressENTER

5) Set the AUTO GUIDE option to OFF

8j Usethe _,_f buttons to sdect DON_ andllyenpress

ENTER

14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

TM program guide (if available in youl _iea).

When us/?l,qIhe TV Guide ()r_Sc'reer_sjzstemto feeof_Ja

pro,gram for t!_efirst tfm¢ it/s recommended tl_at

you

ff the TVpower co_db unplug'Bedf_van extd_dedpetard of

(powerco/d plugged b andpower OFE_to downbad the

entire TVGuideOf7Selr_J?pm,qramsdledu/e Be sure to

on psge 39

15. Program channels into the TV's channel memory

(page 41).

lf; Set up tbe TheaterNet

TM on-screen device controJ feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system components) (page 44).

17 For details on using the memory card ]PEG picture

viewer

and NP3 audio player, see page 82.

18. }:or details on using tbe TV's features, see Cbapter 8.

19 }:or hemp,refer to the Troubmesbooth_gGuide (Chapter

20 }:or tecbnicN specifications, see Cbapter 11.

21 }:or warranty information, see Chapter 11.

22. Enjoy your new TV!

Copyright (d)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

HM94(E)O07 08(1-1ntro)

8 _ 8/30/O4, 1:41 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

TV front touchpad and side panelcontrNsand connections

Front of TV

Side panel

Reset button

NMC

Remote sensor

@

TA_ _,

®

MENU

®

POWER

@

L

TV/VIDEO EXIT _

Channel _&

®

_

Volume 4 _-

®

*Gent/}/touch the printed keys on the touchpad.

U

MENU

Green/Red LEDs

®

Right side of TV

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO3 IN

@

Memory card

slots

@

(_) Remote

sensor (behind the scrserO -Point the

remoEe

controJ toward this area of the TV

screen.

See "Remo_e control ef'_bctiverange" on page 26.

® TWVJDEO -- Repeatedly press to change the source you are viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

HDMI, Color&ream HD1, ColorStream HD2).

®

EXIT --

Press to dose m on-screen memt inst mr?.

® ARROWS _"_ _ -- When a merm is on-screen, these bu_ons fimcdon as down/up/lef}/right menu navigation buKons_

®

MENU --

Press to access the menu system (see page 34).

When a *nenu is on-screen or the TV Guide On Screen program guide is open, this button f'tmc_ions as the ENTER btttton,

®

®

®

POWER-- Press to turn the TV on and off.

CHANNEL _ --

When no mem_ is on-screen, these buttons change the channd (programmed channeIs only; see page 41). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons f'uncdon as up/down menu navigation buttons.

VOLU_

E _t } --When no menu is onoscreen, these buttons adjust the volume leveI. When a mem_ is on-screen, these buttons f'uncdon as lef'drigh_ menu navigation btttgons_

®

6reem_

a__d Red EEDs -When green lights solid

(no[ blinking), it indicates that the

TV power cord is pIugged in and the power is OFE This is caIDd standby mode.

Note: When you f#atp/ILqin the power cord. the green LED will blink

3

fifties After appmximatdy 30 seconds,ihe green

LED will @ht

cafltir_tJOLgS/}/,

at whichpo//ltyau canpress

POWERto turn ON the TX

When red lights solid (not blir_king), it indicates that the

TV power cord is ph*gged in and the POWER is ON.

See "LED indications" on page 94 fi.)radditional in_brmafion.

@ RESET -If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn offthe TV, press this bu_on to rese_ the TM

the eodera pape/ c//por simb_rcDlect to pressthe but&v;

@ VlDEO-3 -- The side pane[

A/V connections are refbrred to as "VIDEO 3" and include standard A/V connections plus opdonaI SMdeo.

(The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V connections are on the TV's back panel; see page 10.)

@ _emory card slots -Insert a memory card into one of the memory card sk)ts to view JPEG rids (such as photos) as a "sIide show" on your TV or listen to MP3 audio rids

(see page 82).

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFIPOBA_ION, All rights reserved.

9

HM94(E}OO9-11 (2A-Cnct) 9

÷

8/30/04, 1:39 PM r

÷

TV back panN connections

For m exp_armtion ofc_b_e wpes see p_ge 11.

®® © @

v v

(9

® ®

@ ANT-1 ((;ABLE) IN and AN'I=2 IN -- Two inputs that support anaIog (NTSC) and digit _ (ATSC) of}:-airantemm signals and analog and digit _I(QAM) Cable TV signaIs.

Note:

If you have art antenna on/)/, connect it to ANT 7 ff you have

both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cnb/e F1/to ANT Z and

the

afTteYiYla

to

ANT;

@ VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN --Two sets ofs_andard

(composite) video and standard audio inputs p[us opdot_al

Swideo inputs fbr cotmecting devices with composite video or S-video output.

on/;/video b_)frnation; sepm_te

cofrg)/ete

COl_nect/ol_

_)fa

@ Coin(Stream ® H[_)-I and Co|orS(ream ® HD-2 -- Two sets of'CoIorStream °')high-definition comporlent video and standard stere() attdio inputs fbr com_ecting devices with comporlent vide() output, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream?

See pages 15 and 17.

Note: Component video cab/e'_ caf?y ong video informaffon,

separate atJd/o cables am t_ciui/_d for a complete coflfTeot/of?

@ AiV OUT -- Standard composite vide() arid analog audio outputs _br com_ecdng a VCR _br editing and dubbing. See page 18 _br details.

@ V_riable Audio OUT -- Stand _rd analog audio outputs fbr cotmecting an analog amplifier with external speakers.

See page 20.

@ Digital Audio OUT -- Optical audio output in Dolby

Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) fbrmat ;¢br cormecting an external Doiby Digital decoder, amplifier,

AV receiver, or home theater system with optical audio input. See page 20.

(Z) G-LINK'" -- For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/

G-LINK cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen_) recording fbamres. See page 25.

@ TheaterNet '' (IR) OUT -- For controlling infrared remo_e--controHed devices through the TV. You can cormect up to r\vo devices with either one of the encIosed IR bIaster cables, and then control the devices using the TV's IR passthrough or TheaterNet"

(on--screen device control) l::eatures.

See pages 21 and 44.

@ Standard Audio IN -- For use when cormecting a DVI device with ana[og audio output to the HDMI input. See page 19. Also see item 10 bdow.

@ HDMF" IN -- High-Defirfifion Multimedia h_tedi_ce inpu_ receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video

fi'om ar_HDMI device or uncompressed digital video _)'oma

DVI device. See page 19.

NOTE:NEVERCONNECTTHISTV TOA PERSONAL

COMPUTER (PC).

(_) IEEEq394 --Two hi--directional digital IEEE-1394 ports

_br conr_ecting mukiple devices with compressed digital vide(). Because these ports are hi-directional, they can be used _br playback and recording. You can control your

IEEE-1394 devices using the TV's The _terNet on-screen control icons. See pages 21-24 and 44.

NOTE:

* IE_ L5'94 c';ff)/e c'afr/es both audio 8f_d video ir_f()_7718tiof_,

no se/)sml_

8u5t/o cabbs 8_

f_qtJited

for a cr)(l_pbte coflnect/of?

* NEVERCONNECTTHISTV TOA PERSONAL.

COMPUTER (PC).

This T1/ is not intended for use with F] PC

@ CabJeCARDrM dot -- For use with a digital security c_rd and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages 12 and 50.

HDMI. the HDMI logo, and High Definition Multimedia interfaceare trademarks or registeredtiademarks of HDMI Licensing,LLC,

CableCARD is a trademark of Cable ]_levision Laboratories, Inc

Copyright (d)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

HM94(E)O09

0

10 _ 8/30/04, 1:39 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

Overview d cane types

THINS

1

TV

m

TO A PF.R$OmAL COMPUT[R

(PC),

THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.

Note: Two duahwand /R bh_stet/G L/IV/( cables af_ /fTr/uded with yau/ TI/ All other requhed cv2_/es,

ff not provided with your other dev/res, cnn be puf(-hased at many electe)rffre accesso/y suppliers

@ Coaxial (F_type) cable is used f()r colmecting and/or cable converter box to the ANT-1 your anterma, and/or ANT-2 RF c_b[e TV seta, ice, inputs on your

TV.

• Standard AiV cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are fbr use wkh video devices wkh st mdard audio and st md _rd

(composke) video output.

These cables (and the rdated irlputs on your TV) are vpica[ly color--coded accord/rig to use: yellow fbr video, red fbr stereo right audio, and whke fbr stereo [e_?

(or mane) audio.

• S-vldeo cable is fbr use wkh video devices wkh S-video output.

Separate audio cables are req_fired fk)r a complete connection.

Note: AR S v/c/eo cable pmv/(/es be_ef picture peffom_ance i'han a composite v/(/eo c_,'b/e

@

@

@

Coa×ial

{F=type) sable

8tandard A/V cables {red/white/yellow}

S-video sable

Component video cables(red/green/blue

of tile pk;'tum peffomTanre /viii be urlaocept_bb

Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use wkh vide() devices wkh component video output, (ColorStre m__)is Toshiba's brand of comporient vide().)

These cables are vpicaHy co[or<oded red, green, and blue.

Separate audio cables are required for a complete cormection.

Note:

(;omponent

video c>_b/esprovide better p/ctu/_ peff(mrmnce thai? a st;md;_fd (composite)

vkleo or S vk/eo cable

HDM] cable is fbr use wkh devices v&h HDMI (high--deft(titian multimedia inter[_tce) output.

HDMI cable deIivers digital audio and vide() in its native [_)rmat.

This cable carries both video and audio irdbrmafiom therefbre, r_o separate audio c _bles are required for a complete HDMI device cormecfion.

See page 19 [br [:_rther details.

_uobwand IR Naater/R=LNR sable

{2 insluded)

S v/(/eocable

IEEE-1394 cable is _br use wkh video devices with compressed digital vide() output d_at meets CEA specifications fbr IEEEq394.

This cabIe carries both video and audio irdbrmafiom d_erefbre, no separate audio cables are required fbr a complete cotmecfion.

See pages 22-24.

Note:

The t/>)nsm/_e/oncapability oflEE_

t394 ruble i_eed with this T1/must be

$400

(400 Mbps max/muf_O

/EEE t394 cobb provides bette/p/ctaf_ pel_)fmar_ce thai7 a star_&ffd

(composite2 video of S video cable

• Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK '" cable is _br use wkh video devices wkh IR

(ird'rared) remo_e centre[. Two of these cables are inc[uded with your TV. One is _k)r cormecfior_ to the G-LINK jack (page 25) to enable TV Guide On Screen_' recording

_bamres (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used wkh d_e TV's IR passothrough

_bamre (page 21) and TheaterNet on-screen device centre[ _bamre (page 44).

Note:

The two/R bb)ste//(_ L/N/( cables/fldua'eg with yauf 73//)ave spec/Sc characteristics that a/Yewthem to e/aiR pfoper!y with tbia T1/_ /R OUT and G LiNK pelts Never use other

aftermarRet

_ blaster

or G-UNg cables with

this ?rg. Other cables 177ay

properly and can cre_se damage THiS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR

TOSHIBA WARRANTX

Optical audio cable is _)r cormecdr_g receivers wkh Do[by °')Digk_l or PCM

(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack. See page 2(}.

Optical audio sable

Note:

Although your TV includes bolh NDM/

and/EEE_394 connections, it may not

operate with anotf_er device you have 1#at

/nr'hJde_ssuch a (reinfection,/:?)r example, ff_e

/EEE-_394 paris af_ not intended to operale

w//h (u/Tent model Mini DV camcordef_, and tf_e NDM;

input is not intended for

(:anne(l/on to a compute/:

('opyfTght protection

mqe/remer?ls may also prohibit of

limit connechwT;z See page _9 for derails

about the NDMI

/npuL See pages 22-24

for

r/e_ta//sabout t#e /EEE-1394 pelts

Dolby is 8 registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories,

Copyright_) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

11

8/30/04, 1:39 PM

HM94(E)OO9-11 (2A-Cnct) 11

÷

A

+ L

You can connect dif'fbrent p.,,pesand brands of devices to your TV in se_era{dif_brent configurations. The connection iIRtstrations in this manual are representative of"b'pical de_ice connecuons only. The inpuUoutput jacks on your de_ices may dit}'er from those illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refbr to each de\ice's owner's manual

This digitaI television is capable of receiving anaIog basic, digital basic, and digital premium cane television programming by direct connection to a cane system providing such programming.

A securiV card (such as a digitaI CableCARD_'*), provided by

F)ur cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital programming.

Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program guide, and data-enhanced tdevision services) will not work with the use of a CaNeCARD and may require the use of"a separate set-top box fi'om your cable operator.

For more intbrmafion, call your local cable operator.

You will need:

+ one digital CableCARD (contact your cabD operator) digital cabD subscription ser_ice (contact your cable operator)

To view encrypted digital channels:

1. Connect your digita{ Cable TV cable to ANT!.

2. With the front of the CableCARD

TM fi_cingright, insert it into the CabDCARD sIot on the back of the TV (see illustration below lefr):

3. Af'ter the CableCARD is inserted, a CableCARD option appears in the APPLICATIONS menu, with infi)rmational screens provided by ),our digital CableCARD service. See page 50 for additional infi.}rmation.

NOTE: theEJECTbutton fwsoving

the@bleO_RD

IVever

object or c_ud (imh/dir_g,

without

limitation,a PCMC/Acnrc/)otherthai7a (}abb('ARD

+

AIw_ysmakesumthe('_@leCARDis_t;,c/rlgtbeconect c/i/_ctkm

ANT1only

A d@qta/cable subscgption £ r_qui/ed

to usea

&@IeCARD

(}OfTtUCt yOUY ()a/)/e

com[)ar_y

for inforyr+ation

fftbe

TI!

locks up with tbe C+ff/eCARD inset+d, press

the RESETbu_o/I on the 73//lorlt of urlp/d? the Tk' plug it b agab

arTd press POWE/Z

+

WTersugngaCa//eCARD, d}anndprog/x_mm/nc_

(page 4

0

£ unneeessafy because the Cg_bCARD automatically loach8the cable d_annd list bto the TV_

The &_b/e('ARD will take several secon& to "pair" with

tbe T_ &_bleCARD /ntomTatkm and channd listings _1/i/I

riot be awfflable until this "pa//2lg" process is completed

CableCARD is a trademark o_'Cable Television Laboratories, lint.

Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)012

12

12 + 8/31/04,12:51 PM r

÷

A

÷ L

Connecting a VCRand antenna or CabJeTV (no CabJebox)

You will need: one coaxial cable one set of standard A/V cables

* For bette/pietu/e peitoe<lanc< if you/VCR has S video, use an

S vkleo cabb (plus rile audio cabbs:) instead of the stund_ffd video

cable HoweveL do not connect botl7 types of video cables to

VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2j at the same time or the picture

pefforTnanee winbe unaeceptabb

* ffyou have a mono I/CR connect L/MONO on the TV to your

VCR_ audio outjnek using tile whM audio cable only

To view the antenna

Turn OFF the VCR.

or Cable

sig!l_al:

Sdect the ANT 1 video inpur source.*

To view the VCR:

T, rn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video inpur source on the TV.*

._[itrn ON the VCR. Sdect the ANT 1 video input source.*

Tune the TV to cham_d 3 or 4 (whiche_er cham_d is vacant in your area).

To use the TV-Guide On Screen recording features:

1. Connect the G-UNK cable according to the instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to d_e A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).

3. SeEd_e VCR to d_e appropriate Iirle input (refbr to your

VCR owner's manual fbr det:ails),and then turn Ot_F d_e

VCR.

4. See Chapcer 5 fbr deEailson seEdng up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See Chapcer 7 fi)r deEailson using the TV Guide

On Screen system.

Stereo VCFI

W

FromCaNeTV or antenna

R

Note:

2_e VIDEO/AUDiO

OUt_/?_cksoutput the s/iqna/sfrom the

ANT 7 ANT2 I/IDEO 1 VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3jacks when the approprtDte /bput mode is se/ectecZ

The unaatborized mcordiug, use, distribution, or revision of televisiou programs,

videotapes,

DVDs, aud other materials is p:'obibited under the

Copyright Laws of tbe United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal

liability,

Connecting a camcorder

You will need: one set:of standard A/V cables

* For bettel pletule peifoirrlanc< if yore cari?corUel has S video, use an

S video cable (plus UTeauciio cables;7instead of tile sl_snd_ffdvicieo c'_sble

DO I)Ot CostnectboW?81),5' video cable arid a st_oldiffd video cable 17)VIDEO

3 at the same time or tbe pk'tule peitoersance win be tJitaccef2bdt/e

To view the camcorder video:

Sdect: t:heVIDEO 3 video inpuE source.*

* Io select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control [see page 67).

Io program the PV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

8/31/04,12:51 PM

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 13

[

÷

A

÷ L

Connecting a VCRand Cable box

%u will need:

¢ one CaNe signal spotter five coaxial cables two sets of standard A/V cables

* For bette_ picttne peffoer_ance from youz VCR If your VCR has

S vide& connect an S-video cable (plus dTe auckb cnt@s3 instead

of the standard vkleo c@/e Do nor connect an S vkleo c_b/e and a s£ffldnfd video cabb i>_VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same f/?rle

or the picture perfoeTlance wi// be unac'cept_bb

* ffyouhaveamono

VOR connectL/MONOonthe

FVtoyour

VCRt_audio outj_ck usieg the whffe audio cable only

* For be:tel pictm_ peitoer?ance f/orTI you/Cable boy if your &_hle

box has componel2t video.

VOtJ

6";ff7CORReCt

cables Cph/srite auc#o cable..L_bsteild of the st;lndard video cable

from the Cabb box _ £ile Co/orS:ream HD 1 inputs on the 71/:@u

would tlTen sebct C'ok_rStmam

HD 7 as the video input SOLIfCe

*

Who/) you use 8 &sble box. you may not be able to use the

r_l?7ote

contTo/ the T_/

to Dlo_lelTi

or access

certain

featte_s on

D

To view basic Cable channels and use the _W'8 features:

Sdect the ANT 2 _ideo inpu_ source.* Use the TV front pand controIs or remote controI to change cham_ds and access the TV's tbatures,

C3

To view basic and premitml Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Selec_ daeANT 1 video input source.*

Tune the TV to channd 3 or 4 (whichever channd is vacant in your area). Use dae Cable box controls to change cha*mds,

OF.,

i[hm ON the VCR. Tm_e t[_eVCR to channel 3 or 4

(whichever channd is vacan_ in your area). Sdect the

VIDEO 1 vide<)input source.* Use the Cable box controls

to

change cham_ds,

To view the VCR:

Tftrn ON the VCR. SeJec_ the VIDEO 1 video softrce2 inpu_

Note: Thiswill providebetter picturepertonnanceLtvou

item on th£ pnge

or...Turn

ON the VCP,.. Select: the ANT 1 video inpft_ source.*

Tune the TV to cha*md 3 or 4 (whichever cha*md is vacant in your area).

* lb select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control

(see page 67). lb program the f_d remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.

Stereo VCR iN from ANT

FromCablel_/

Note:

_he VIDEO/AUDiO OUT,lacks ou@ut the s/_lna/s#ore the

ANT _ ANT2 I/IDEO _ VIDEO 2. or VIDEO 3j?_cks when the appropn?_te input mode £ selected_

[_ To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work with your cable box and to use the TV Guide

On Screen recording features:

1. Connect d_e G-LINK cable according to d_e instrucuons on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connec[ed to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (relbr to your

VCR owner's manual for detaiJs), and then mm OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for de_aiJson setting up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See Chapter 7 [br details

on

using the TV Guide

On Screen system.

The m_a_thorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of televisio_ programs,

videotapes,

DVDs, a_d other materials is prohibited u_der the

Copyright

Laws of the UnRed States a_d other countries, and may subject you to civi_ and criminal liability.

Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)012 25(2B-Cnct)

14 .

8/31/04, 12:52 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

Connecting

a

VCR

and

sateJJite receiver

Note:

The TV Guide On Screen _ system does not receive progrJn

StereoVCR

You will need:

_, three coaxial cables

_, one set ef cemper_er_t video cables (ifyour sateIIite receiver does r_e[ have cernpor_ent vide(), cotmec[ the standard A/V cables only) three sets of standard A/V cables

f%r bette/picture peffonrlanc< ifyoln satellite

receiverand VCRhaveS video connect S vkleo

videocables Do not connectboth _/pesof video

cable i?)VIDEO 1(or I/IDEO 2) at the same fibrinor

the picture performancewinbe unacoe/:)tabb

From

antenna

T1/(VIDEO 0 _z)your VCR_AUDIO OUTjaek ushw

the whiteauogbcab/eon/_

D

To view satellite programs using the component video connections:

Sdec[ the ColerStream HD-! video input source on the TV.*

To view satellite programs using the standard

From satellite dish m video connections or to record satellite programs:

T, rn on a11three de, ices. Set

the

V(-;R to the appropriate litle irlput (refer te your. VCR owner's manual tbr details).

Sdect the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*

D

To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:

Turn ON the VCR. Sdec[ the ANT-! video input source

on

the TV.*

Tune the TV

to

cham_d 3 or 4 (whichever cham_d is vacant in your area).

Tttrn ON tl'_eV(-;R.Ttme tl',e VCR to the charme[ you war_tto watch. Sdect the VIDEO 1 _ideo input source on the TV.*

SateNtereceiver

Note: The VIDEO!AUDIO

OUTj?_cl<8output the s/}'na/8 from the

ANT 7,ANT2, I/IDEO L VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3y?mks when the appropn_te input mode is selected

* ]o select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control

(see page 67). ]o program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,

The

unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of televisioa programs, videotapes, BVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

Copyright Laws of the UNrealStates and other countries, and may sobiect

To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (retbr to >ur

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See Chapter 7 [br details on using the TV Guide

On Screen system.

÷

HM94(E}012-25(2B-Cnct}

15

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:52 PM

15

F

A

÷ L

Connectinga DVDplayerwith S-video,a VCR,and a Cablebox

Fromantennaor CableiV

Y{m will need: five coaxial cables two sees of standard A/V cables

Note: Ifyou havea mono VCR,connectL/MONO on the 7T'

(VIDEO 7) toyouf VCR_aud/boutjack using the whM audio

cobb onl_

one S-video cabie one pair of standard audio cables

Note;

* Ifyour DVD plnyerdoesnot haveS vkleo,use a standard

videocable insteacLDo not connectan S video cnble anda

smnda/dvideo cobb to VIDEO 1CotVIDEO2) at the same

time or the picture

performance

WiN

* ffyourDI/Dpl_yerh_scompooentvideo, seepage ZZ

* Do not c'oonecttke DVD pl,hyerand VCRte the sameset of

StereoVCR

IbJ from ANT

OUT to TV

TV

connectedto VIDEO2)

To view basic channels and access the TV's features:

Sdect the ANT 2 _ideo inpuE source2 Use doe TV controls to change cha*mds and access the TV's features.

C3

To view preminm Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Sdect _heANT 1 video input source.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever charred is vacam in your area). Use the Cable box controls to change ci_a*mels.

()F.,

._fltrn ON the VCR. T_me the VCR to channd 3 or 4

(whichever charred is vacam in your area). Sdect the

VIDEO 1 video iplpm source.* Use the Cable box controls to change chaimds.

Note: When you use a Cable box, you rn_y not be able to

use the f_/770te control ih)prog/_m or access co/rain

[eatto_s

of} the TV

To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD pkuer. Sdect the VIDEO 2 _ideo inpu_ source/

To view VCR 1:

T, rn ON the VCR. Select the VIDE() 1 video input source on the TV.*

or... Tttrn ON the VCR. Sdect the ANT 1 video inpu_ source.* Trine the TV to chapmel 3 or 4 (whichever cbapmel is vacant in your area).

* lo select the video input source, press [N PUT on the remote control

(see page 67). ]o program the 7_/remote contlol to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,

DVD pmayerwith S-video

Note:

7he VIDEO/AUDiO OUTj?_eks output the s/_!nalst/ om the ANT 1

ANT2` VIDEO L VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3j?_cks wheo the appmprgffe /?tput /node

is selected

To enable the TV Gnide On Screen system to wnrk with your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen

recording feanres:

1. Copmec_ the G-LINK cable according to the ip_str,cfions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).

3. SeEthe VCR to the appropriate Iine inpu_ (refer to your VCR owner's manual for de,oils), and then turn OFF the VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 tbr details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See ChapEer 7 tbr details on using the TV Guide On Screen sysEeln,

The

unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of tdevision programs, videotapes,DVDs, a_d other materials is prohibited under the

Copyright Laws of the U_ited States and other countries, a_d may subject yea to civiJ a_d crimi_a_ _iabi_ity,

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA) ION. A[] rights reserved.

HM94(E)012

6

16 _ 8/31/04, 12:52 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

Connectinga DVDplayerwith ColorStmam(componentvideo)anda VCR

Your TV has Co[orStrearn _*(component video) inputs.

Com_ecdng a DVD player with cornponer_t video outpuE (such as a Toshiba DVD player with Co[orStrearn '_) can grea@ enhance picture qua[it T,

You will need:

_' two coaxial cables

_, two sets of standard A/V cables

For

bertel pit'tul_ peffomlance, ifyoul VCRhas S video, _se an

videocable Howeve/;do not cof?f?ect

i)/f.)e_

of vkJeocnb/eto

VIDEO 1 (of VIDEO2) at tbe sametime or the picture

peffomTancewillbe unaccept_bb

ffyou havea mono VCR,coffflect UMONO on/7?e71/

(VIDEO 0 re your VC)R_aud/boutjack using tile whM audio

cable only

_' one pair of standard audio cables

_, one see of component video cables

• X)u can connectthe componellt videocnb/es

(i)lus auc]k)

cables)from the DVD p/aye/to eitherset OfCO/OfStI_RIT?

]3*C/(S

Of 7 the ]]/(HD

1

of HD 2) ',rileO<)bfStl_alT]HD- Zand

HD 2jacks cnn be used with Pmgf_ssl_ (480p.

720p) and

/nteflnced(_80/: 10800scan system&A 708d s/qnd will

pfovk/e the best p/cruleperformance

ffyourDVDp/ayerdoesnotl)avecomponentv/deo, see

page 1U ff J/otJrDVD pl_ye/has HDMI vkJeo,seepnde Z,9

To view antenna or Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR, Select the ANT 1 xideo input source on the TV.*

TOview the DVD player=

Turn ON d_e DVD player. Sdect d_e Co[orStream HD-!

video input source on the TV.*

To view the VCR:

Turn ON d_e VCR. Select d_e VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*

OF.,

Turn ON fl_eVCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*

Time the TV to channd 3 or 4 (whichever channd is vacant in your area).

D

To record a TV program while watching a DVD:

Turn ON d_e VCR, Tune the VCR to the charmel to record. Select d_e Co[orStream HD-! video input source on the TV* to view the DVD.

* lb select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control

(see page 67). lb program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,

Fromantennaor Cable g StereoVCR

DVD Nayer with component video

Note: 2)e VIDEO/AUDIOOUTjacks output the WnaL8tror:_the

ANT I, ANT2, VIDEO L VIDEO2, of VIDEO3]ncks whet1tbe appropriateinputmode is selected

To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:

1. Connect d_e G-LINK cable according to dae instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).

3. Se_the VCR to the appropriate line inpu_ (refbr to your

VCR owner's manual fbr details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See Chapter 7 fbr de_ailson using the TV Guide

On Screen system.

The

unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materiMs is prohibited under the

Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject

you to civil and crimina_ liability,

17

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)

17

Copyright _') 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFIAT[ON, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:52 PM

[

÷

Connecting two VCRs

You will need: two coaxiaJ cabJes two sets of standard A/V cables From

For better pk-ture peffo/rr_ance, iT VCR 1 has S video, use 8f7S v/_teocable (plus the audlb cablesj ibstead of the st.l_durd wdeo cable Howevel; do slot connect botb

_ypesof video cable to VIDEO 7 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time anter/na or Cable

or the plctur_ performance

wi2

be unacceptabb

, ff I/CR Z has inono audlb, connect L/MONO

oil the TI/(VIDEO 0

to the aud:o out jack ors VCR Z uslbg the white audio cable ofyl_z

" DO not

COfyfyeot frye sai77e VCR tO

the

output

TV at tbe same time and

Ibputj_cks

on tlye

To view the anterma or Cable signal:

Tttrn OFF VCR 1, Sdect the ANT-! video input source.*

To view VCR 1:

Tttrn ON VCR !. Sdect the VIDEO 1 video inpu_ source.*

To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:

Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line input (refbr to your VCR owner's manuaJ for detaiJs).

Sdect the VIDEO 1 _ideo input source.*

Note:

, Ifyou have a &lble box corlnect the Cable box and splitter iT) VCR1 as shown on page 14

TheVIDEOOUTslgnallbcorpoi_qesMJcrov/slon_copynglyt

protection

technolog_ wlylcl7may prevent you flora

t_cordlbg celt; ilb

@°iriiTv !@

L R

S

Tile VIDEO OUT j?_c'kdoes not output tbe POP plcture

O W_efl dle POP wlbdowis open the AUDIO OUTjacks output the

sound of the active window (mail? or POP) fZbradditional

/llformat/on, see "Notes about recording"

on page 73

Note: 77/e VIDEO/AUDIO

OUY)bcks output tbe s/clnals t/om tbeANT L ANT2,

VIDEO _ VIDEO 2, of VIDEO 3/acks when

the appropriate klput mode is selected

Z

* ]o select the video input sotirce press IN PUT on the remote control

(see page 67), ]o program the PV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,

To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:

Note:

If you connect you! devices according

to the

i/lu'_tlyltlon above,

youwillrecordtlom theTV&aide

**Thisprv}ductincorporatescopyright proteclion technology that is protected by

U.S,patents and other intellec*ualproperty rights. Useof this copyright protection technology must be authorizedby Macrovision and is intended for homeand other limited pay perMew usesonly,unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.

Reverseengineeringor disassemblyis prohibited. Macmvision is a _egiste_ed trademark of Macrovision Corporation,

The unauthorized

recording,

use, distribution, or revision of television programs,

videotapes,

DVDs, aad other reateria_s is prohibited under the

Copyright

Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

1. Co*mec__heG-LINK cane according to the ir_str.c_ions

on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR2 is com_ec_ed to the A/V OUT ja&s on the TV (see ilb*s_ration).

3. Se_the VCR to the appropria;e lh_e input (refbr to your

VCR owner's manual for de_aiJs),and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 fbr details on se_fing up the TV Guide

On Screen system.

5. See Chapter 7 fbr details on using the TV Guide

On Screen system.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)012

8

18 _ 8/31/04, 12:52 PM [

÷

A

÷

Connecting an HDMI" or a DVi device to the HDMI input

The HDMI I_]input on your IV receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or uncornpressed digkal video fforn a DVI [2]device.

This input is designed to accepEHDCP [31program material in digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B-compIiant I<consumer electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with

HDMI or DVI outpuD.

The HDMI input is designed tbr best perlbrmance with 720p and 1080i high-definition video signals, bu[ will also accep[ and display 480i and 480p signals.

[

NOTE: NEVEiR gONNEC'[ TH|S I'V

TO A PERSONAL C:@MPUTER

(PC).

THISTV IS NOTINTENDEDFORUSE WITHA PC,

[q HDM/

H'_/h Def/n/l/on Muli/medkl Interf_ce

[2] DV/

Diq/tal ViUeo /nten'nce

Is] NDCP

N/_'h bafTdw/dth D/_'/?;IIContesTtPfotect/orl

[4] E/A/CEA 86 WH67B compliance cove/s the tf_lf7smlsslof7of

docompfmssed d/_'/ta/ v/Ueo w/lh h/gh ba/ldw/dth d/?/ia/ cof)imf)t

protection, wlTM) /s brits[1 stgmdardl2ed for fmception of hl_'h definii/on

video signals Because tiffs/s an evoMng tedTno/oss

h'/s

possible that

some devices may riot ope/_te properly w/lh the Th'

NOTE: _ ensure that the HDM/ ot DV/ device /s reset

pmpefljz ills _mcommended that you b/low these

pmcecMes

"

Whel7 ium/Hg ol7 your electronic

C'OfYlpof7eRtS,

tHrH

0#t the Tg first,

and tl_eo tl_e HDMI o_ DVI device

Whel_ turning offyour elect/ohio compoilen_5, turn off

the NDMt or Oil#

dev#ce first, and then tl_e TQ:

To connect an

HDMI device, you will need:

. one HDMI cable (type A cormector)

Fbr proper operation, it is recommendeci

ibat you use

as short an HDMI cable as possible

You should not

enc;ounf_r r/ifficulty ff you use an HDMI cable shorl_r

tf_ar716 4 fl (,Smj

HDM/

c'ab/e transfers both video and audie, Separate arTa/og audio cab/ms are not required (see illusirasfon

be/owj

Some CDVs (viUeo CDs] may not output Uigila/ auUie signals, In that case, you may hear sound by

c'onnecUrd analog audio c.ab/es I-Iowmver; ff you c:c_nnect arTa/og auUio cables with ibis c.onnec'Uon, ibe HDM/

t>rTninal on the TV win not rec'cive UveI-tDMI cJg)italaudio

signal and you viii/hear analog auUio only

,gee "Setlieg ibm HDMI auUie merle" on page 49

HDI_I device

To connect a DVI device, you will need:

. one HDMI-to-DVI adap[er cable

(HDMI type A connector)

_b_ pmper opelai/on, lhe lef_gtl_of an HDMI-io

DIll

ad_pimf cHb/e dToul(I riot exceed 98 tt C3mj Yhe

rmcomrrle/_ded lerlg177/s 6 6 tt _2m]

" one pair of standard analog audio cables

An HDMI to DIll adapte/ cable tlansfef_ vk/eo on{lz Separate analog audio cabbs a_e required (see/llusl's_tion belowj

See "Setik W ffTe HDM/ aur//o moUe" on page 4,9

OVldevice

TV

TV

÷

L

HD MI, the HDMI logo, and High Definition Multimedia Inte_lace are trademarksor registeredtrademarksof HDMI Licensing,LLC,

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 19

÷

8/31/04,12:52 PM

19

[

A

÷ [

Connecting a digital audio system

The TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack outputs a

p[_ or>channe_ PCM(p<se<ode

meduhtion) signal fbr use with an external Dolby Digital decoder or other external audio system with optical audio inpus.

You will need:

¢ one optical audio cable

To control the audio:

Tim1 on the TV and the digital audio device.

Press MENU on the TV's remote centre[ and open the AUDIO lnentL

Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.

hi the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT rid& select either

DOLBY DIGITAL or PCM, depending <7,1your device (see

"Sdecting the optical audio output tbrmat" <3,1pate 81).

TV

Turn off the TV's bulk-in speakers in the same AUDIO SETUP menu (above). Also see '{Turning off the buih-in speakers" o,1 pate 8!.

Note:

*

Someaudio

systemsmay

sTot

with

Dolby

D/_qitgJ

S/qfl3f8 Older eL]clio SySl_tTIS

fhc_[ 8re

Rot compat/ia/e with

SttJRdJtff_] optics/out s/qf78f8<178y

frlay d;image speake/s of heao_phof?esTHIS DAMAGE

IS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY

* 21e DIGITAL AUDIO OUI)iack may not output some d/d/t_l audio

surecos

because of c'opy

f_St/fet/of_&

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs,

videotapes,

DVDs, and ether materials is prohibited

under

the

Copyright

Lows of the UnRed States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability,

Connecting an analogaudiosystem

This connection albws you to use external speakers with an externa[ attdio amp[ifier to adjust the sound [e_e[.

You will need: one pair of standard audio cables

To control the audio:

Turn o,1 the TV and the stereo amplifier.

_,_,_>_,1 "Wrn_,lg

speakers" <>,1page 81).

Note:

7b hea_ sound w/?el_us/bg an external au&b amp//?te_

the volume of both the TV and the

8fglp/ff/ef

must

be set _) a

reasonabb //}ten/?ig bveZ

TV

Anam0gaudio stuNNer

÷

HM94(E)012

0

20

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORATION.

AH rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [

A

÷ L

You can use the TV's IR OUT jack (infrared pass<hrough) to rernotdy operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-controlIed devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote<entre[red VCR or DVD phyer) enclosed within an entertainment center or simihr cabineE. Without d_e

IR OUT connecuon, the device typically would need to be visible to operate it remotel>

You will need: one dual-wand IR bhster cable (included with your TV) od_er audioAideo cables as required to connect d_e de, ice(s) to the TV (see pages 13-2(t)

To connect the IR blaster cable:

1.

Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device.

This sensor is marked on some de_ices.*

2.

Align one of the IR blaster cable's wands abouE 1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of"the device and attach it using double-sided mounung tape. If you have a second device, attach the second wand in a simihr manner.

(See il&stszldov at ri@t.)

Note: If you

& nothavea seconddevk:e,

thesecondv>_nd

Infrared

IR blaster cable wand

Back of TV aDmox ncn from qevlce

,

Plug d_e IR bhster cabb's plug into one of the TV's

TheaterNeE OUT jacks.

To control the device(s):

Point the TV remote controI

(programmed to operate the device; see Chapter 3) or the device's remote controI at the f'ront of"the TV and press d_e button tbr the desired t:m_cfiomThe signal passes from the remote control through the TV to the device via the IR bhaer cable.

Note:

*

Ifvouusethedevice_r_mote

c'ont/dto

ope/_ffe the device,

you

alsowillneedtousetheTV?remotecontrolto

operate theT_/

.

For add/tioR8/oorT_/el opt/on&

see "Theater\let

c'ont/d" at rl_'h£

on screen

device

H you camtot locate

the device

s infrared

sensor:

1 _J/y_OFF JTedevfce

2 St_lrtirlg at the Iowe/left coeTer of the device, plaice the end of the device _ f_h_lote control

_¢vit/I

the/nflYff_d e/Tlitte/3 so it touches tile

front of the device and p/ess POWE/Z (Do not use the T1/_ r_lT}Ol_e

control for this step _

3 ffthe device turns on. the p/uce the temote oorFld touched the devk;'e is the location of the sensor

4 /fthe devk'edoesnotturnon,movethetemo_

corK/elsl/_htly

I2)the

//_lht

5

Repeatstep 4 unt//i/ou locatetl}edev/ce_/fffl_r_dsensor:

TheaterNet

TM

o -scree device co tro

For additional controI options tor y)ur home theater system, set up the TheaterNe_ on-screen device controI tbature. You can use this fbature to contro_ many

IR remote<entre[red devices and IEEE- 1394 devices using the on-screen control icons.

See pages 44 48 for deta/Tson

setting up and using 7heaterA/e_

See pacms22_4

for details on

connecting/EEF

_394 devices

Note: 77_eTheater?Jet loon controls a/e the only device [Lir}ct/ons awffl@le when the icons ar_ on screen 7_)aocess other device function& close the Fhea_r#'et icon w/ndo_/

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

21

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct} 21

÷

8/31/04,12:53 PM

[

÷

A

÷ L

You can ttse the two bi-direcdonaI IEEEq394 ports on the back of your TV to cormect digita[ video devices that meet CEA specifications tbr IEEEq394.

Because these ports are bi-direcdona[, they can be used for both p[ayback and recording.

Because

IEF E

1884 /s an evolving technolog_z it/s pogsfble that some

of all of tke c.onnectMty features of a device you connect to _7}e7-1/

tlffougb the/EEE

1394 ports may not operate X)u

d?ou/d

conf/rrn

that the dev/ces you desffe to use with the IEEE 1394 pOllS will

operate with those ports

• Fh/} TV does not support 8/I pos:4b/e IEEE 13'94 signal lypes For

bfofmatk_n on s/}'naZ8supported by the/EEE

1394 ports, see

IEEE 1394 cable c_vTiesboth 8udk) and v/deo infom_atk)n;

no sepaf_ll_

8udk) cnb/es 8f_ f_qu//_d

br

8 complel_

connection

You will need:

_' one (or two) [EEE-1394 cables

TV must be $4 O0 (_ O0 Mbps fn_xi/nlorO

_' additional A/V cables if'your device is analog-compatibb

(see "Using anaiog-compadbb IEEE-! 394 devices" bdow).

/"

Nff_E,- NE_ER

CONNECT TN|$

T@

A P_RSONAL

COMPUTER (PC}.

,' _ ", THISTVISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWKHAPC,

Supported sig Ns

The IEEE-1394 ports support the sig*mlslisted bdow only.

Akhough incompadbb vide<), audio, and digita[ contro[ signa[s taproot be decoded by the TV, these signa[s may be passed through the [EEE-1394 cabb to other compadbb devices.

Incompadbb devices may not appear in the TheaterNer" menu.

, MPEG-2 digital

video

signals

Other dkj/t./ vk/eo sign;_/8 such as DV _'/?/eo ;;,re

klcompatible and must be decoded by the soume device and

sent to the TV as anabg video (composite of S video)

, Dolby Digital a_d P]IPEG digital audio signals

Od_er d/g/m/ aud/b signals (such as DPM MP3. and D75")

8f_ /bcompat/b/e and cannot be decoded by the T1/

*

EIA-775

and AV/C digital control

Your TV can serve as the control center l%r many devices that are compatibb with EIA-775 or AV/C [EEE-!394

control standards (described bdow).

The TV csrlnot contfo/

/E_E

1394 devices thRt use _vny otbe/

conife/ si?gnd_fds

-

EL&-775 digital control aik)ws tinring devices (such as

Cabb boxes) to send simpb graphics; however, this standard does not allow the TV to control the Cabb box through IEEE- 1394.

- AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (alch as power, pia> stop rewind, t_st-forward, pause, and record), as appiicabb to the specific device.

Using TheaterNef on-scree device

Using a Nog-compatiNe devices

EEE-1394

Some digital IEEEq394 devices are compadbb with analog signals. For exampb, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play

VIIS or S-VHS fbrmat videos. Such devices allow you to play apia[og tapes that you rented or recorded, or record anah)g programs from antemm or Cabb TV systems. To use the

IEEEd394 device's analog features, you need to com_ect the device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus audio cables) in additiop_ to copmecdng d_e IEEEq394 cable.

Note:

If you have an/FEE 1394 deviee connected to botll di_tW and an_:log ir_puts on tile TV, the TI/automatk-_ffly

switches between analog and dig/tsq modes, as needed, wben

the bitiW deviee access is initig_tedusifw the TheatefNet bu_ton

See page 44

[of

detg_i/son using the 2?eaten\let _eatufe

>)u can use the TheaterNe_ tbamre to control some IEEE-1394 devices using <m-screen controI icons. See page 44 fbr derails on setting up and using the TheaterNet fbamre,

IEEE 1384,you can t/y i_/ng /R p;_ssthrough with the ;q/%

f_rrlote contld (p;_ge21) of use the dev/ce_ f_rrlote contlo/

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)012

2

22 _ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

Connecting an AVHD (e×temal

hard

drive) or D=VHS digital

recorder

>)u can cormect an IEEE-1394 cornpatible D-VHS or AVHD

(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba's

S:,_mbior'' 160HD4 AVHD) to record high defirfition and standard definition material f)'orn either tuner and control live

TV (pause, rewind, etc.).

When you connect a D-V-HS or AV-HD device to the TV:

* The remote contro[ keys (LIVE, REW, PAUSE, PLAY,FF, eEc.)are auEomatically actNated to allow control of live TV.

* TheTV Guide On Screen system is automafica[[y configured to a[[ow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 fbr deEai[s.Also see page 49 fbr deEai[son seEdng the AVHD device skip time.

* Some programs may riot be recorded due to copy protection restrictions.

iiiiii_}i[iSj

I

This TVis compatible with the new Toshiba

TM iiiiii

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorded

IEEE-1394 device initialization

When )ou co*meet a new IEEE-1394 device to the TV and turn it on, the device immediatdy announces its presence to the TV

(and other networked IEEE-1394 de, ices, if any), and d_e f}allowingdevice initialization screen atttomatically appears.

Note:

With some devices, it may _v_ketap to one mk_ute

/or this screen to appear

1. If you have cormected your IEEE-1394 device to an analog input also, use the

&V< _

buttons to sdect the input in the ANALOG INPUT USED field; o_herwise, leave it set to '_None." (See 'q_Jsinganalog-compatible IEEE-!394

devices" on page 22.)

2. If you want to label the device, highlight EDIT LABEL and press ENTER.

overdkjilsqvideofecofdin,qandp/aybae_,Thinkofit asa

i "tapelessVCR"fordi,qlta/le/evision,Youcanpause,rewind,or i and

I apeto rewind,you canwowa programthatsiafl_drecording progr im ,bto

r,,:

funct/bnaliTyyou must f/f:_tset t4r>the TV Ou/de On Screen system (_ee

Chapte_5)

3. Press the

&_< _

buttons to sdect a character _br the first space and then press ENTER.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.

5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER to save the irffbrmation.

Note:

* The T1/m_ynotrecognizellon

A/Vorllon compatff_/e

IEEE _394 devices, however these devk;'esmay sti// be avni/able to other compatible/EEE _394 devices on the networf< o You

may

be able to use the

7-1/_

f_/TlOl_ CORt/O/tooperate some

coirlpatit)/e IEE_ _384 devices _)u must first program the rwrsote control to recoc_n/ze the device (see Chapter 3)

/_ J/OU ileed to use the remote control that came/vlth

the devk;'e

o 7bsbiba Is Isot Mb/e for the oper_ltion of any/EEE _394 device

otbe_ thall the _:vhba 3?mbio AVh'D r_corder:

÷

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 23

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:53 PM

23

[

A

÷ [

IEEE=1394 device management

The IEEE-!394 device infbrmation is saved in the TV's mernor> You can edit this device infbrrnation (fbr example, to edit the device name, change the analog input infbrmadon, or dde[e the device information f'rom the TV's memory if you no longer use that device).

To edit the IEEE-1394 device information:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.

2. HighIigh_ INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new see of INSTALLATION mepm icons will appear on-screen, as shown in s_ep 3 brow).

,

Open the DEVICES menu, highlight IEEE-!394

DEVICES, and press ENTER.

Important

information

regarding

UEEE-1394 device

interconnection

Note:

, Do not loop tbe last device in the chab_ back

to the T_.

If lhe cieviee chain is/oopecL the TV may /lot

_1/o_;_

ethel deviees b the d}ain

° Place

devices"

with the slowest communication

speed at

the end of each chaD1./fs dev/ee with a slower cammu/_/cat/on

speed is placed ahead era f,'_stefdevice b the ehain, the s/qnd

from the slowe_ devic'e will/lffefgf_ with 17}e sternal

fleI7_ the f_ste_

cievice 7o dete/TT_ifiethe con_mul_icr;,tionspeed of an IEEE 1394 cievice, look _f an ",5'"number near the deviee t_/EEE 1394 eof_nectoL 2?e hkjhet the "S" ntJrrlbeL the fnstef #_edevice

/i yauf

cieviee is/iotmat?ed with a/1%'" numbeL look in the device 3 tJsef

manual or call the cJeviee/_laflt./f_/ctt./[_[_ ted_ni(-_#support number

° If your IEEE= 1394 device has a two=position power

switeb, place the device at the end of the chain

or leave

the power switch

ON at all times,

ff the powe_ switch is OFF

it will interfere w_thsignals from devices be/7ind it in the el}ain

The maximum length

for an tEEE= 1394 cable between

each device is 15 feet.

° This TV/1_an/EEF _394A device 77_e/_EE _394B protocol is

__stef and intended to allow to_ /onge/ d/st_nc'es between dJev/ees andmult/ mom s_/stems /EEE _394A to IEEE _394B eonverteta

(_w_i/_bleat softie e/eotfoflics

SL/pplie/_)

may allow compatibility of

IEEE _394B devices with you/existing IEEE _394.A devices

The i"l_fflsnll:5siof7 _394 c_',bleused k_//tht/7/s 7-1/

must be .94O0 (4 O0 M/g_s max/munl)

4, Highlight the device you wan[ [o edit and press ENTER,

÷

5, Folh)w the on-screen prompts to modia_ the device in_brmation,

HM94(E}012

4

24

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [

A

÷ L

This" cormeetien

is necessary for tire TI! Guide Go Screen TMsystem

to work with your cable box to receive

program listings arm to

enable

TI c Guide

On Screeo reeordi#g features

with your IiCR.

Note: This connection

is- not necessary

for AIiNO or D-IiNS recording

devices.

See pages

23 aim 49 for further details.

After you cormecc your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables included with your TV) fi'om your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK jack on the TV.

Note:

TV &;ida On &;r_en /;;fogle_rl ciHt_}is #w;ff/;slJletivedcff7 tile ANT Z _snd AN7-2 kvTtervT_r

tlvrxLqh the VIDEO 7inputs ff you /lave a cable box cwlrTected to VIDEO 7 FV Guide On Sc'/_en proglem

d_ff_is/lot 8vai/i_/_lethTough Bey off?el/fl/?)uts or7 U)/s T_ _se _he corTRectior7bfom_at/o/1 on p_ges 73 2:5

The G-LINK com_ecfion is necessary to enable the following f_amres of your TV Guide On Screen_' system:

If you have a (;able box, you need to connect: the G-LINK cable t}'om the Cable box to the G-LINK jack to receive the TV Guide

On Screen system's program listings tbr your Cable service.

If you have a VCR, you need to cotmecc the G-LINK cable from the VCR to the

G-LINK ja& to use the TV Guide On

Screen system's recording f_atures.

Frenl el Cable box

Te connect to the G-LINK iack:

1. Locate the inl}'ared sensor on the front of your VCR or

Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices2

Aligu one of the G-LINK (IR blaster) cabIe's wands about

1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the

VCR and acEachit using double-sided mounting tape.

If you have a Cable box, acEachthe other wand in a similar marmer. (D'ee

i/,2_e'ts_ilioss

)

Note:

If you do not have a C2ff)lebox, coil tl_e second wried

/vl?ll a r_Jt)t_erbarTd afTdleave it behbd i<heTV

3. Plug the G-LINK (IR bk_ster)cable's plug into the TV's

G-LINK jack.

For details on setting up the TV Gtfide On Screen system:

See Chapter 5.

For details on using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide;

See Chapter 7.

*If you camret

locate

the device's

infrared selrsor:

2 Smrtlbg at the ©wer left comer of the device, pbce the end of tile

dewce_ r_mote control (wth the/Tffrared enTittel2 so it totJches the

tent of dTedevice and press ,oOWER (Do i_ot use the TV_ t_mote

c'ont/d tor tlliS step) cJevk'e

is

the Ioc8_<ior7

4 ffthe cievice does/lot turn on, move the r_mote cerT,/el s@htly to the

fi_Jh t

8fTdpres\_PO VV_R a_aio

5 Repeatstep 4 unti/vou/ocate

the o'evice_infsar_dseesoi:

÷

25

HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)

25

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:53 PM

yemete co#tyef

Learning about the remotecontrol

The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a complete list of the remo[e controUs f_mc[ions, see the female control f_mctiona_key char[ on pages 28-29.

POWERturns the TV on and off Press POWER to turn orl the TV. The red LED indicator on the

TV front touchpad win be illuminated. Press POWER again to turn off the TV,

Note:

The QI//ck Restart settl)?g will affect the amount of time it takes fo_ the picture to appear

whe/} you tt/m el?

tile T_ See page

50/of deMIs

UGHTThe f'lrst press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on the Illuminatior_ mode. With the I11umirmtior_mode on, pressing any other key lights the keypad for 5 seconds

(1(t seconds if you're in programming mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle beFween turrfing the Illumination mode on and off,

Chaired

Numbers

(0-9, -/lO0)

direr@ tune charmeIs,The "-" button is used to tune digital ch rends (page 68),

INPUTselects the video input source (page 67),

MODEcycles through the six device modes: TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and

AUDIO2, The mode indicator light will remain lit _br a few seconds (page 27).

pie SiZEcycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3, and FuII (page 70),

TheaterNetDEWeEdisplays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 44),

TheaterNetCTRLaccesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 44),

MENU

accesses the menu system (p_ges 34 and 35).

TVGUIBE

opens the TV Guide On Screen system (Chapter 7),

INEOprovides detailed ir_brmation on highlighted items in the TV Guide On Screen system

(Chapter 7),

DVD _}N

SLOW/DIR

DVD OLEAR

SKIP/SEARCH

Arrow buttons (AT4 _) sdect or adjust programming me)ms.

ONa,V

udes through programmed ch umels when no me)m is or>screen (41); funcdorm as p_ge up/down when a menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide

On

gcreen system is open

(Chapter 7).

VOLA_'

adjusts the volume levd,

EXIT

doses or>screen menus and the TV Guide

Or1

Screen system.

CNRTNreturns to the last viewed charred (p_ge 68), or stops the picture viewer slide show (pge 83),

Livereturns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while cor_tirming to record to the 'lbshiba Symbio _''AVHD recorder (pages 23 and 49),

NOTEreduces or turns offthe sound (page 79).

Note:

The eFFOFsqessa_e "/Vot

Available" will appear ff you press a key for a function that is not ava#able,

Remotecontrol effectiverange

[>()/?ltremote cent/el towmd remote set?sot

on t/ol?t

of

7-1/ q fl

J

SKIP/SEARCH_ and I_ jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide

©n Screen listings (Chapter 7),

USTdisplays the 'lbshiba Symbio

TM

AVHD recorder play list (if avail_Ne) (page 23),

FAY

CH A_'

tunes to the next higher/k)wer favorite charmel (page 43),

VCR+accesses the TV Guide On Screen manual recording functior_.

SPLITturns the POP fe _ture on and off (p_ge 73).

pie NODEselects the picture mode (pge 76).

FAYSCANaccesses the _worite cham_d search ftmction (page 75).

FREEZEfreezes the main picture in the double-window (p_ge 74).

16.4 ft (5m)

Copyright © 2084 TOSHIBA COFIPORAT ION. All rights reserved,

HM94(E)026

6

26 _ 8/31/04, 1:07 PM [

÷

A

÷ L

installin9 the remote control batteries

To install the remote control batteries:

CAUHON: A/ways &spose of ha/toNesin a des/iqna_edd/sposa//ec;,at/_n.

Never tf_rowbattenes inte a fire,

1. S_ide the batEery co_er of'f'the back of"the remote control

F_

J

2, h_staHtwo "AA" size a[ka[irle batteries. Match the + and - symbols on the batteries

to

the s) mbo_s on the batEery compartment.

Note:

. Batleries shou/d a/ways be disposed ofw/Ih the

environment in min¢:_A/ways dispose of balleHes m

a(;cor_/anre with applk;ab/e /aws and r_giJ/al/ens

. Never mix batlery types or tJse new and used

batterfes in cembffTatien.

. When necessary le re/-_/ar,,ebatledes if7 ff_e mmole

(:ent,,ol, a/ways replace both balteries will7 new one&

. Air,lays remove batterfes from mmo/e

coniTo/ffthey

am dead or if the emote

centre/is not te be used

for an evtended perfod of time. This win prevent

batte/y acid from/eaki/w inte ff_e battery

coeTpaFlTnenL

3, Slide the battery co_er on to the remote control until the lock sm_ps,

Using the remotecontrol MODE buttonto control your other devices

Your TY remote control has one dedicated TY mode and five programmable muki-brar_d modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2.

The deEmk device modes and programmable device modes are listed bdow,

Note:

77_eF1!re/note control/s prepregrammeo' to ope/ate most _sh/ha devices

If !ou own a non 7#_shibadevice or a 7_shba d_vice that the remote centre/is not pf_plog/aFn/7_ed to opef_?te,you will need to prog/_m the rw77ote controL See

"PlOglTlfTIn_iL_l

r_rnote contld tO

opel_ffe )lOUl

other

dell/ces"

on page 30

1) TV Toshiba TV

2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver

3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR

4) DVD Toshiba DVD

5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver

6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD

1) TV

2) CBL/SAT

3) VCR/PVR

4) DVD

5) AUDIO 1

6) AUDIO 2

Toshiba TV

Mttlti-brand video/audio devices

YoU can direcdy sdect the de_ice mode by pressing the corresponding number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE buteon.

,j-C)

Note:

Altllo_\?17your new TV_ remote centre/incItJcJes

codes tot mary clev/ces, it fTTaynot include

code:_ for some or all of tl_e features on celta/n devices you wish to centrex ff you are unabb to

preg/afl7 rise TV_ re/77otecontso/ i_)operate

you/device or some of dTefeatures on tlsat

device use rite dev/ce_ r_mote centre/or the

corff/ oL_oil the dev/c'e

Copyright O 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

27

8/31/04,1:08 PM

HM94(E)O26-33(3-RC) 27

[

÷

A

÷

Remote ControUfunctional key chart

CALL

Selects the image shape.

Men u/

Guide Men u

......

TV Guide ......

Guide Inff_ ......

Theater Net

......

Device

Theater Net ......

Control

Enter ......

Men u select ......

up

Menu select ......

down

Menu se]iect ......

left/right

Exit ......

Remote control device mode selection

Lights the remote ke> and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode. *1

Sleep timer

Po_ve_ _

Power

Po_ve[ _ PovJeE

Power

Power Power

Digit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 6

Digit

7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

(digi ta]_ separator)

Digit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

E)igit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

¢_ub

cham_el)

Digit l

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit- 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

I00

Digit- 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit- 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

+I0

AVinput

AVinput 2 Digit 2

AVinput 3 Digit 3

AVinput 4 Digit4

CD

Tm_er

Phono

Cassette

Aux

---

1 Digit 1

Digit 5

E)igi t

6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0, I0

< TV VCR input

TV

--TV

Digit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

< TV

TV

TV

TV TV .:

Action,

Menu

Guide

INFO

TV <

Enter, Select

Menu select up

Menu select down

Menu select left/right

Exit

TV <

Men u

TV <

DVD setup

TITLE

Top menu

Sul)dtie

Audio

Enter

Men u select up

Menu select down

Men u se]iect left/right

DVD clever l\_eH 11

Guide

INFO

ADVANCE

---

Enter

Men u select up

Menu seDct down

Menu se]iect left/right

---

Channel Channel up/down,

Pageup/d0wn

Voh*me up/down

Voh*me up/down .2

up/down .2

Previous channel

Previous channel

Live .........

O,]-_-ee,_ --display

Channel up/down

Vol ume up/down .2

Previous channel

Channel up/down

--Channel up/dowl]

--Channel up/down

VoIume VoIume up/down .2

up/down .2

--DVD return

Voiume Voiume up/down .2

up/down .2

Voh*me up/down .2

---

O>_c,'een

display

O>_c,'ee,_

display

Live TV

---

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

HM94(E)026

8

28 _ 8/31/04,1:08 PM

[

[

÷

Remote Controlfunctional key chart(co.t ..ed}

SCM'_2

Sound mute .2 Sound mute .2

Sound mme _-) Sound rante _-)

Sound mute.2 Sound

Inu[e .2

Sonlld mute.2

Sound

--Slow FWD

SlowFWD

SlowREW mike

g2

SlowFWD

Skip F_[)

Skip REW

Rewind

Pattse

Play

Fast FWD

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

TV/SAT

Rewind

Pause

Play

Fast FWD

TV/VCR

SkipFWD

SkipREW

Rewi_3d

Pause

Play

Fast FWD

---

---

---

---

---

---

Skip FWD

Skip REW

Rewi;]d

Pause

Play

Fast FWD

Rewind

Pause

Play

Fast FWD

Reverse

Disc shif't

AM/FM Disc shif}

Replay

Stop

REC ]_,ieml

(SingleClick)

LIST

FAV cMnnel up/d own

VCR+

---

---

Stop

Record

(DouUe Click)

Stop --Stop Stop

Record

(DouUe (',lick)

Split

PIC M()DE

FAV SCAN

Freeze

< TV

TV

TV

<

TV _

TV

TV _

TV

TV

TV

,_

TV

TV

TV

-

TV

<

TV _

TV _

TV

TV

TV

<

TV

TV

TV

NOteS;

....

will send nothi/ig

" TV" will jump to Tt/

"

.* VCR"wil/fiJmp_b/ustact/ve

a key is pressed b that mode)

VCRorDVD

_Back/_jht key is toK_e

Does/._ot send IR signal

('Lastactive

I/CR/DI/D'isthemodethatf_maklsk_faminiml£T_of5seconds,

_2 K)lume will punch thmtLd/? to 71/by ciefaul_ I/Vhefl the volume/2s unlocked, all 17}edevk;'es will have their own volume ff ttleif ID has

volume dnt_l F/TeAUD modes (/eceiveL CDj will have thei/ own vo/tJi77eJ voltJFtle/oo'/</Sdone to T_/[CBL/SA7,- V£'R/PVR, or DVD

mode See

"rising

I'he VO/tJFne

orff

÷

HM94(E)026-33(3-RC) 29

Copyright _? 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

_ 8131104,1:08 PM

29

F

A

÷ [

Programmingthe remote control to operate yourother devices

Device code setup

1_ Refer to the muIti-brand remote contro_ device code table on pages 32-33 to find the code for the brand of'yottr device.

If'more than one code is listed, try each one separatdy until

3xm find the one that works.

2. Press MODE mlfiI the Mode indicator fbr the device

(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights up.

3. While holding down the RECALL bumm, press the

Channel Number buttons to enter d_e fbur-digit code fbr your brand of'device. If' a valid code is entered, the mode indicator will blink twice. If' an invalid code is entered, she mode indicator will blink one long blink.

4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to test the code.

You have entered the correct code.

ff'&e device doey J_otre_j.,ovdh &e re,,_olecomrol:

You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3 and 4 using another code.

Note: ir_addition to POVdER, coslfhz71that aNnecessa/y keys

of 7the TV f_fTsote crJp_/olopel_ffe you[ cievice ff some keys

are not opei_@)na/, repeat the device code setup LisiiW

8fsothe/ code (if otlse/ codes 8re//{_ted

for you/

devicej

St,afte/ tfyieg all i/sted codes, the necessa/y keys rio slot oper_m your dev/ce, use rise device_ of_4ii?aitemote cont/o/

5. Press MODE to select the TV mode to control the TV.

Note:

/although the TV _emote c'of7tlol inciudes codes for masly device& it may

not/rsclude codes for some or all of the features on certain ciev/ces you

wish to controL

if you

are unable

to progr_sm the TV femote cofstf_)/to

operate you/cievice o_ some of the features on that o'ev/ce, use the

device's fwnote control or the cosltmh osl the device

• _)schtimeyoudsailgetheba_eriesyouw///needtoreprog/_mthe remote cosfffoZ

• Some fsewe/VORs

[espof)ci

to

e/the/of two codes These VCR_ have a

sw/lch bbe/ed "VCRWVCR2" /@our VCR has this kind of switch and

does not _espond to tile codes for VotJ/ VCP,brand, set the switch to _?se

other posiUon ("I/'CR 7"or "VC?R2') and teptogm£rl tile tWTsoteco/st[oL

Searching and sampling the code of a device (8500)

If'you do

riot

know the device code f'or a particular device, you can cycIe the remote controI through the avaiIabIe codes for that device mode and sample the f'mlctions to find the code that operates the target device. The keys avaihbIe to be sampled, provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,

VOL &, CH &, and PLAY.Invalid keys will be ignored while in program mode.

To cycle through each available device code and sample its

_nctions:

1.

Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.

2.

WhiIe biding down RECALL, press 8 - 5 - 0 - 0.

The remote control

will

enter program mode.

Point the remote control at the target device and press

POWER (or other f'ttnction buttons that are available to be sampled).

/TiDe device respowts> &e re,,_otec0mr0L'

Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit the program mode.

ff'&e does

s_otres?ond > &e rev_olecovtrol:

Press A, arid then press POWER.

Repeat this step until the device responds co the remote control, and then press RECALL.

Note: When a seamh cycle h comp/eter/, the mode indioalor vdii b/ink throe times. The remote oontto/ wi// begin Io r:yc/e Usmugh the avai/ab/e codes again, if no key

is pressed wilhir? 10 seconr/s whi/e programming,

lfse

remote cotstsT/ win exit he program mode and return to file

pmvsbus corse.

-POWER

-Numbers

MODE

EA

--VOL

A/_ i RECALL

÷

HM94(E)026

0

30

Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

.

8/31/04, 1:08 PM [

A

÷ L

Using the volume lock feature (8000}

For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the voIume controls (VOL &/Y and MUTE) can be locked to the sdec_ed device mode. This fba_ttredoes no_ apply to the AUDIO 1 and

AUDIO 2 modes.

To lock the volume controls to always control the

CABLE/SAT device w*lum.e (for example):

1. Repeatedly press MODE to sdect CABLE/SAT mode.

2. While holding down the RECALL burton, press 8 - 0 - 0 - 0.

3. Press VOL &.

The CABLE/SAT mode ligh_ will blink two times docked).

To reset the w*lume controls to the original device mode:

1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 - 0 - 0 - 0.

2. Press VOL V.

The mode light will blink four times (*mlocked).

Operational feature reset (8900}

This tbature dears aII seEup tbatures not rek*ted to "Device code set tip" arid resets the Valttme Lock to "TV/'

To reseEthe features:

WhiIe hoIding down the RECALL button, press 8 -9-0 - (t.

The Mode indicator will blink two times, and d_en pattse and blink two more times.

-POWER

-Numbers

MODE

_VOLA/T i RECALL

÷

HM94(E)026-SS(3-RC)

Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, A[] rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 1:08 PM

31

F

A

÷

Multi-brand remotecontrN device codes

VCRs/PVRs

B_ed

ADMIRAL

A[WA

AKAI

AUDIO DYNAMIC

BELL&H( )WELL

BROKSONtC

CANON

CCE

C'ITIZEN

(RAIG

CURTIS MATHES

DAEWO()

DBX

D[MENSIA

EMERSON

FISHER

FUNAI

GE

(3(3 VIDE()

GOLDSTAR

GRAD[ENTE

HITACHI

INSTANT REPLAY

JENSEN

[vc

KENWO(bD

LG

LXI

MAGN A\a )X

MARANTZ

MARTA

MEMOREX

MGA

MINOLTA

MITSUBISHI

MU LTITECH

NEC

OLY M

P[(2

OPT[MUS

ORION

PAN ASONIC

PENNEY

PENTAX

Code

(t137, 0151, (t163,

(t149, 0150, 0182

01 (16

(tl70, 0171,0168,

(t134, 0156

(t123, 0145, 0100,

(t127, 00168

(t124, 0123

(t139

(t139, 0110, 0111,

(t134, 0157, 0158,

(t184, 0185, 7104

(t139, 0110, (t106,

0111, 7104

(t159

(t127, 0106, 0100,

(t1(t7, 0108, 0105, o 1 o 9

(t131, 0123, 0124,

(t173

0139, 0110, 0111

(t106

(t124, 01(t9

(t138, 0140, 0147,

(t148, 0141, (t142

0100, 0145

(t135

(t127, 0132, 0181

(t129, 0114, 0115,

0116

(t139, 0111

0105, 0113

(t120, 0126, 0180

(t123, 0125

(t143

(t106

(t1(t5, 0129, (t106

(t145, 0124, 0127

(t143, 0101,0124,

(t175

(t139, 0110, 0111

(t145

(t143, 0126, 0119,

(t1(t3, 0125, 0142,

(t120, 0118

(t105, 01(t8, 0109,

(t1(t7, 0113, (t165

(t127, 0126, (t120,

(t134

(t133, 0145, (t124

(t138, 0140, (t147,

(t148, 0141, (t142,

(t161, 0164

(t147, 0127, 0104

0139, 0110, 0111,

0134

(t124, 0123

(t128, 0121, 0135,

01 (16

(t126, 0120, 0132

(t123, 0124, 0121,

(t122, 71(t0

(t124, 0100, (t145,

(t105, 0139, (1110,

(1111

VCRs/PVRs {cont.}

BPand Code

PH[LCO

PHILIPS

PIONEER

PROS(AN

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

0100, 0111, 0145

(t131, 0124, 0127,

(t123, 0126, 0120,

0143

(t131, (tl23, 0124,

0173

0123

(t145, 0100, (t123,

(t124, 0131, (t146,

(t1(tl, 0102, (t133, o 174

(t121, 0122, 0123,

0124

(t133, 0124, 0105,

(t136, 0109, 0140,

(t127

(t133, 0145, 0100,

(t123, 0124, 0131,

(t146, 0101,0102,

(t170, 0172, 0174,

(1176, 0183

Replay TV

REALISTIC

SAMSUNG

SAMTR(tN

SANSUI

SANYO

SCOTT

SEARS

SHARP

SHINTO

SYMPHONIC

TASH] R()

TATUNG

TEAC

M

SIGNATURE 2000

SINGER

SONY

SV2000

SYLVANIA

TECHNICS

71 (12

0124, 0105, 0136,

(t1(t9, 0140, (t127

(t137, 0102, (t104,

(t133

0163

(tl39, 0126, 0120,

(t152

0105, 0109, 0113

0101, 0102, 0104,

(t109, 0138, 0140,

(t147, 0148, 0126,

(t120

(t105, 0106, 0107,

(t1(t8, 0100

(t135, 0136, (t167,

(t162

0117

(t127, 0135

0117

(t128, 0129, 0130,

0153, 0154, 0155,

71(tl

0127

(t131, 0123, 0124,

(t127, 0178

0127, 0168, 0177

01 (16

(t139, 0110, (1111

(t139, 0110, (t127,

0111

(t121, 0122, 0123,

(t124

TEKNICA

THOMSON

Tivo

TOSHIBA

(t124, 0127, (1112

(1179, 0183

71(t0, 7101

0101, 0146, 0166,

(t160

VECTOR

RESEARCH 0111

WARDS

YAMAHA

(t135, 0136, 0109,

(t144, 0106

(t105, 0139, (1110,

(1111

ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169,

0180

Cable boxes

Brand

ABC

ARCHER

CABLEVIEW

CITIZEN

CURTIS

DIAMOND

EAGLE

EASTERN

GCBRAND

GEMINI

G .I./JERR{ )LD

HAMLIN

HITACHI

MACOM

MAGNAVOX

MEMOREX

MOTOROLA

MOVIETIME

OAK

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

PULSAR

PUSER

RCA

REALISTIC

REGAL

REGENCY

REMBRANT

SAMSUNG

&A.

SLMARK

SPRUCER

STARGATE

TELECAPTION

TELEVIEW

TEXSCAN

TOCOM

TOSHIBA

UNIKA

UNIVERSAL

VIDE( )WAY

VIEWSTAR

ZENITH

ZENITH/DRAKE

SATELLITE

Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,

Code

1121,

1123,

11(t9,

1122,1111,

1152

1151,

1128,

11(t6,

1131

1110,1114,

1153

1129,1130,

1107,1150,

1101,

11(t5,

1132

1116

1132

1115

1132

1112,

1118,1140,

1142,1145, 1141,

1149

1134

1137,

1138

1105

1132,1105,

1111,

11(t5,

1112,1113

1101

11(t5,

1132,

1148

1110

1105

1101,

1144

11(t5

1124

1132,

11(t5,

1122,

1125

1132

1105

1113

1112,

1124,

1129

1134

1132,1125

1132,

1122,

1119,

1126,

1121,

1123,

1105

1143

1124,1125,

1127,1120,

1122,1111,

1152

1140,

1145,

1141,1142,

1118,1112

I l (13, 1124

I l (13,

I 1(18

1104,1105,

1133

1119,

1126,

1124,1125,

1127,1120,

1135,

11(t4,

1132,

1122,

11(t6

1136,1147

1146

1125

1132

1129,

1117,

11oo

1130

1100

HM94(E)026

2

32 _ 8/31/04, 1:08 PM [

L

÷

MuRi-brand remote control device

codes

(continued)

Brand

ADMIRAL

AIWA

CARVER

DENON

SANSUI

SANYO

SCOTT

SHARP

SHERWOOD

SONY

SOUN DE-SIGH

Code

6126

6133, 6135

6129

6142, 6151

EMERSON

FISHER

GARRARD

HARMAN KARDON 6120, 6121,6123,

HITACHI

JENSEN

6119

6107

6134

JVC

KARDON

KENWOOD

6139

6105, 6106

6117

6140, 6141, 6145,

6148, 6151

6123

LX]

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCNTOSH

NAKAMICHI

6100, 6101,6111,

6145

6136

6129, 6 ] 32

6129

612 ]

6110

ONKYO

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PION EER

QUASAR

RCA

6114, 6115

6108, 6118,612(},

6122

6124, 6125, 6127,

6150

6129, 6130, 6149

6108

6125, 6127, 6124

6147, 6137, 6138,

6131, 6152

6110, 6146, 6113

6105

6110, 6146

6142, 6143

6120

6128

6144

TEAC

TECHNICS

VICTOR

YAMAHA

6112, 6116, 61 ] 8

6127, 6124, 6125

6140, 6141,6145

6102, 6103, 6104

Receivers

Brand

ADMIRAL

AIWA

DENON

FISHER

GARRARD

HARMAN KARDON

JENSEN jvc

KENWOOD

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCNTOSH

MITS UBISH!

NAKAMICHI

ONKYO

OPTIMUS

Code

4120

4125, 4126, 4146

4134, 4135, 4136,

4143

41(t4

4113

41 ] 5, 4123, 4145

4129

4132, 4133, 4140,

4144

4100, 41(}8, 4141,

4142, 4147

4127,4128

4124

4116

4148

41(}6,4117

4109,4114

4103, 4127, 4131,

4130

Receivers (cont.}

Brand

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

QUASAR

RCA

SANSUI

SHARP

SONY

SOUNDE-SIGH

TEAC

Code

4119,4118,4121

4 ] 23

4105, 4107, 4150

4119, 4118, 4121

4103, 4105, 4127,

4131,4130, 4149

4103, 411 I, 4139

4134, 4137

4122

4138

4112,4113,4111,

4110

4121,4118, 4119

4132, 4133

4101,41(}2

TECHNICS

VICTOR

YAMAHA

Laser disks

Brand

DEN()N

HITACHI

KENWOOD

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MITSUBISHI

NEC

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

PR()SCAN

QUASAR

RCA

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SHARP

SONY

TEAC

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

Code

51 ] 4

5100

5102,

510 ]

51 ] 4

51 ] 4,

5114

5104,

5115

5103

5118,5119

51(}5, 51(}6,

51 ] ]

5114

51 ] 4

5104,

5115

51 ] 4

51(}5, 5106,

51 ] 2

51 ] 4,

51 ] 3,

5107,

5110

51 ] 4

51 ] 4

5 ] 01

5117

5116

5108, 51(}9,

Copyright _? 2804 FOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

DVD players

Brand

AIWA

APEX

DENON

FERGUSON

HITACHI jvc

KENWOOD

KONKA

MITSUBISHI

NORDMENDE

ONKYO

ORITRON

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

RAITE

RCA

SABA

SAMPO

SAMSUNG

SHARP

SILVANIA

SMC

SONY

TECHNICS

THOMSON

TOSHIBA

WAVE

YAMAHA

ZENITH

VIA LTA

FUNM

Satellite receivers

Brand

DISH

NETWORK(Echostar)

ECHOSTAR

EXPRESS VU

G.E.

G.I.(GENERAL

INSTRUMENT)

GRADIENTE

HITACHI

HNS(Hughes)

MAGNAVOX

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PRIMESTAR

PROSCAN

RCA

SONY

STARCHOICE

TOSHIBA

UNIDEN

Code

2105,2115,2116,

2117

2105

2105,2115

2106

2108

2114

2103,2111,2112

2103

2101,2102

2104

2101,2102,2118

2108

2106,2109,211(},

2113

2106,2109,2110,

2113

2107

2103,2108

2100,2103,2119,

2120,2121,2122,

2123,2124,2125

2101,2102

Code

3123

3120

3100,3117

3101

3111

3109

3115,3129

3119

3105

3101

3121

3124

310O

3103, 3116

3102

3113

3101, 3106

3101

3114

3110

3108

3132,3118

3125

3104, 3126, 3127,

3128

310O

3101

3103

3122

3100, 3130

3107, 3112

3131

3132,3118

HM94(E)026-33(3-RO)

33

÷

8/31/04, 1:08 PM

33

÷

F

The illustrations below and on d_e nex_ page pro_idea qttick o_er_Jew of your TV's menu system.

Mainmenu layout

To open the main menus (ilktstrated bdow), press MENU on d_e remo_e control or TV fi'ont pand.

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

TM

_ Audi0 Player

_ Digital CC/Audio Selector

_ Picture Viewer

CableCARD -4 [ CableDARD

TM options window (available only when Cab/eCARD is inserte_O]

Video

r Picture Settings -4 [ Picture Settings window ]

_ Theater Settings -4 [ Theater Settings window ]

Advanced Picture Settings -4 [ Advanced Picture Settings window ]

Audio

E Audio Settings -4 [ Audio Settings window ]

Advanced Audio Settings -4 [ Advanced Audio Settings window ]

Audio Setup -4 [ Audio Setup window ]

_____>

Prefek'enKaes i avorite Channels -4 [ Favorite Channels window ]

Closed Caption Mode-4 Off/CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4/T1 /T2/T3/T4

Closed Caption Advanced -4 [ Advanced Closed Captions window ]

Input Labeling -4 [ Input Labeling window ]

Game Mode -4 Off/On

Menu Language -4 English / Frangais / Espa_ol

Locks

-_ Enable Rating Blocking -4 Off/On

-_ Edit Rating Limits -4 [ Edit Rating Limits window ]

=_Channels Block =_ [ Channels Block window]

-_ Input Lock =4 Off / Video / Video+

-_ Front Panel Lock -4 Off/On

-_ GameTimer

TM

-_ New PIN Code

-4 Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min

-.--)

Setup

-_ Installation -4 [ Installation sub-menu opens -4 See h_stallatien sub-metlu details on r_ext page _

-_ Sleep Tinier-4 [ Sleep Timer window ]

=_On/Off Timer =_ [ On/Off Timer window ]

-_ HDMI Audio Selection -4 HDMI 1 -4 Auto / Digital/Analog

-_ Slide Show Intewal -4 2 sec, / 5 sec. / 10 sec, / 15 sec, / 20 sec,

-_ AVHD Skip Time -4 I nfin. / 3 rain, / 5 rain. / 15 rain.

-_ Quick Restart -4 On / Off

]

HM94(E)034

4

34

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 1:11 PM [

÷

Setup / lnstaRation menu layout (co.tinued)

To open d_e INSTALLATION rnenu (illustrated bdow): press MENU on d_e remote contro_ or TV front panel open the SETUP menu, sdect INSTALLATION, and press ENTER.

MENU / Setup / Installation

_

TerrestriaJ

Input Configuration -4 [ Input Configuration window ]

ANT1 1

Channel Program t ANT2 ] _ [ Scan for new channels on selected antenna ]

Channel Add/Delete -_ [ Terrestrial Channel Add/Delete window ]

Signal Meter -4 [ Signal Meter window ]

_evices

E EEE-139/4Devices "_ [ IEEE-1394 Device Management window ]

TheaterNet Devices -4 [ TheaterNet Device Setup window ]

TV Guide

On Screen Setup -4 Start =4 [ Start TV Guide On Screen setup ]

Time and Date -4 Strut Setup -4 [ Time and Date Setup window ]

System Status -4 System Information -4 [ System Information window ]

Navigating the menu system

You can use the buttoi_s on the remote control or TV front touchpad to access and na_ igate your TV's on-screen menu system.

" Press MENU to open the menu

SySteiIL

TV front touchpad

POWER

Use the up/down/bfdright arrow buttons (AV@ _) on the remote

EXIT _ _ _' A MENU

(ENTER*) centre1 or TV front pand to mo_e in the corresponding direcuon in a menu.

, Press ENTER to save your memt settings or sebct a highlighted item.

(A highlighted menu item appears in a dif'fbrent color in the rnerm.)

* The MENU button o/_

the TV front touchpad _mct_bns

as the ENTFR button when a meRtJ /s oR sct_efl

All menus close automatically if you do not make a sdection within 60 seconds, except the signal meter menu, which closes automatically af}er 5 minutes,

To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.

Remotecontrol

-MENU

ENTER

&

--

EXIT

35

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04,1:11 PM HM94(E)O34-35(4-Menus) 35

[

÷

A

÷

Msystem sd

The TV Guide On ScreerF'_ system in your TV is a flee interactive program guide that uses the infbrmafion you enter during the fi_llowingsetup process to provide you with a channd lineup and program listings fi_ryour area. The listings are automatically updated several times a day.

Note:

• X)umustfil_tsetu/:)yourTVaccorclirijtotheapplieable

Ifyouconnecl'eda

7odTbaS)_;_fJio '_'AVHD, loumustperfom_l

the fo/Iowisw T1/Guk/e On &-leen system setup/i-i order to use

the Syr/27io_ full functionality See pages 23 arid 4,9

k)r

det_u/8about AVHD di?lto/ recorders

To set up the TV- Otfide On Screen system:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.

2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER.

Configuring the location of your

W

Screen

1:

Sdect the TV location (USA or Canada), and then press ENTER.

Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada) for )'our location (use the Number buttons on the remote control fbr numbers and the A_' buttons fbr letters), and then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.

L

,

A ne'w set o_"

INSTALLATION merm icons appears on-screen (see illustration ac right).

Open the TV GUIDE

ON SCREEN SETUP menu, highlight START, and press ENTER.

4. The fi)lk)wing screen opens. Highlight "Sec up TV Guide

On Screen now" and press ENTER to continue.

Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?

Kyou sdect YES (and press

ENTER), screen 4 appears.

Kyou sdect NO (and press

ENTER), screen 12 appears.

Screen 4: Do you haxe a Cable box connected?

Kyou sdect YES (and press

ENTER), screen 5 appears.

K vou seIect NO (and press

ENTER), screen 13 appears.

5. The _blk)wing screen opens. Press ENTER to continue.

÷

36

HM94(E)03(-39(5-TVGsetup} 36

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04,1:28 PM [

A

÷ L

Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box pktgged into?

If you sdecE ANT 1, screen 6 appears.

lf),ou select VIDEO 1, screen 7 appears.

Screen 9: To a[k_wthe TV Guide On Screen system to find the correct code fbr your brand of Cable box, tune your Cable box _o channd (t2, leave the Cable box and TV ON, and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Screen 6: Sdect the channel your TV is tuned to when using your cabIe box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.

Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen system wiII tes_ the code fbr the brand of Cable box you sdec_ed. Do no_ press any keys on the TV, remo_e control, or CabIe box untiI the testing process is comp[eEed. When testing is comp[eEed, screen 11 appears.

Screen 7: The or>screen diagram shows the correc_ way to connect your Cable box to the G-LINK _'*jack on the TV.

Make sure the G-LINK cable is installed properly. For additional details, see page 25.

Press ENTER to display screen 8.

Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to charade[ 09 after testing, sdect YES and press ENTER. If you sdec_ed

ANT 1 in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you sdected

VIDEO 1 in screen 5, screen 12 appears.

÷

Screen 8: Highlight your CabIe box brand, and then press

ENTER to display screen 9.

If your Cable box did not tune itself to channd (t9 after testing and you want to test the same code again, selec_

TEST THIS CODE AGMN and press ENTER.

If you want to test a dif'fbrent code, sdec_ NO and press

ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Note:/VIc;rg

oat;lel)oxesrequiretestingmote thanone code

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtAT[ON, All rights reserved,

37

A

÷

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system (eo.t .ued)

Screen 12: De you have an ailtenna connec[ed?

Sdec[ either YES or NO, and [hen press ENTER.

Screen

13 appears.

Note: Ifyou selectedNO i/_scleen 3,you mustselect YESin

thisscreento [_oeivea channd lineup andprogf_lmI/stings

Screen 16: The ()n-screen diagram shows the correc_ way [o connect yeur VCR [o the G-LINK

TM jack on the TV. Make sure the G&INK cable is inst0Jled properly. For additional details, see page 25.

Press ENTER [e display screen 17.

L

Screen 13: Are the set[ings cerrec[?

If you select YES, screen 14 appears.

If you select NO, screen 1 appears.

Screen 17: Sdect your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.

Screen 18 appears.

Screen 14: Congratula[ions!

You have cemplet:ed basic

TV Guide On Screen sys[em setup,

the amount

the 1-1/GuideOn .%v_enservice

Press ENTER to display screen 15.

Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, inset[ a [ape (el[her blank or previeusly recorded), and [hen press PLAY. Screen 19 appears.

Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen system will _est the cede fbr the brand of VCR you sdected. Do net press any keys on the TV, remote control or VCR until the testing process is comple[ed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.

Screen 15: Is a VCR cermected?

If you sdect YES, screen 16 appears.

If you sdect NO, screen 21 appears.

÷

38

HM94(E)03(-39(5-TVGsetup) 38

Copyright © 2904 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04,1:29 PM r

A

÷ L

Screen 20: If your VCR stopped ph3qng the tape after testing, sdect YES and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.

Screen 22: Congratub_tions! You ha_e successf'uHycompleted

TV Guide On Screen system setup, Press ENTER to display screen 23.

If3<_ur VCR did no_ stop playing the tape after teMng and

you want to test the same code again, sdec[ TEST THIS

(_ODE AGAIN and press ENTER.

If you want to tes_ a different code, select NO and press

ENTER. Screen 19 appears.

Note:/Vh,

fg IiCRs require

testingfnoiwI<harl

Screen 21: Review the setup infi._rmation displayed on your TV screen (an example is shown bdow).

Screen 23: This screen provides hdpful infbrma_ion on using your TV Guide On Screen system.

Press ENTER _o exit the TV Guide On Screen setup and watch TV.

c{ ,* ;v,_ a _v

, ._ ;,

> *, _ >

}#* >a{

< v >, } a;>,:_,;#,

?

,,

{4>>, {1 {

]{

:{ {}{}{{{

{{}{ {

}1{[

,{

{a

If the infi)nnafion on your TV screen is correc_ for your setup, select YES, END SETUP and press ENTER. Screen

22 appears.

If the infbrmation is incorrect, sdect NO, REPEAT

SETUP PROCESS and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.

TV Guide On Screen

Reminder

The TV Guide Oi) Screen system receives program listings data through your Cable or over-the-air vide() signal In order to receive regular program listings, please remember to do the fbllowing:

1, Leave _he TV in s_andby *node when it is not in use

(such as overnight or when you are

not

watching it) by _urning it OFF but leaving the power cord plugged in,

2,

]Ifyou have a Cable box connected, [eave it ON,

3, Ifg)u have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not in use, (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 13 fbr VCR connection instructions.

If you have more than one (-;able system in your area, you may be prompted to sdec_ which CabIe system's program data to download. If so prornpEed, follow the on-screen instructions,

÷

HM94(E)036-39{5-TVGsetup} 39

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtAT[ON, All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 1:29 PM

39 r

year

Fb_ menu 17_v/9"_t/on/?Jstmot/ons, see Chapte_

4

$decting the menu language Configuring the antenna input

SOUrCeS

You can choose t}om three dif{_rent Ianguages (Ep@ish, French and Spanish) for the or>screen display of adjusmaen[ menus and messages. (The TV Guide On Screen meuas are in English, regardless of the language selected in d_is menu.)

To select the menu language:

1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.

2. HigNight MENU LANGUAGE and press ENTER.

3. Highlight your preferred meua language in the menu sidebar and press ENTER.

To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:

1. Press MENU and open d_e SETUP menu.

2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new see of INSTALLATION meua icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 bdow,)

q_

4. Press EXIT to dose the PREFERENCES memt.

3. Open d_e TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight INPUT

CONFIGURATION, and press ENTER.

Note:

77_e TFRR£S7-R/AL

frlelw

eT_ly riot L)e

8t)t;'e&_;iL;/e

_ite/rls will be '_v>TyedotJt:) hi SOITleklshfflces (for exzT/rlple,if a c_bM box/s connected to the ANT 1 #iput ofitone

of the dte/r_g TV Guk#eOf?

h-leon setlW

÷

_}Navigate

,_Select

_Back A_E×Jt

4. Press _ to select the inpu[ source (Cable or antenna) for the

ANT 1 input on d_eTV.

Note:/fa

c'_lblebox h connected _bthe ANT 7 input &Jring

TV Guide On Sc/een setup, the entire 7TRRESTR/AL H?el?u bl///If?otbe acceasible, bc/ud/n d the input soume [er ANT L

whM? wi// automaf/_-a/ly dispkly "Cable Boz"

5. Press V and then _

to

select the input se,rce (Cable er antenna) tbr the ANT 2 inpuE on the TV, if applicaNe. If

Sou have not copmected aplything to ANT 2, skip this step.

HM94(E)048

0

40

6, To save your new settings: Highlight SAVE and press

ENTER.

To revert to your original settings: HigNight CANCEL and press ENTER before saving.

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 2:03 PM [

A

÷ [

ProgrammingchanneJsinto the TV'schanneJmemory

When }_oupress CHANNEL A or V on the remote control or

TV front paneI, your TV will stop only on d_e charmds scored in the TV's cham_d memor>

Follow the steps brow to program cha*mds into the TV'._

cha*md memor>

Programming

channeUs

Your TV can automatically detecEall active charmds in your area and store them in its mernor> After the chaimds are programmed amomaticall> you can manually add or erase individual cham_ds.

Note:

* X_ulnustconfl_,umtl_ear_tenrmislputsourcesbefore proclmnTmkTg charffTeL8 Tc_ee page

40)

* 777eautomaticchanne/pmgr_mminclpmeessdoesNOTelase

dTannels that were plev/ous/y progr_lmmed /nto the 7-1/_ rylefi7or_ but adds newly found dTanne£ to _<heex£tilw set of

programmed channels _ mnTove a ehannd from the memory

yOU fTIUSt rTlanuil/Ijl delete/t

_'_ee fText paule_

* 7_JtunetheTVtoachanndnotpmgfammedkTthed_annd rTler77Ol%

VOU iFitJst use the CJiTalllld f_lYlOt8 COIItlDL

/VtJi77/?er

buttOlTS oR the

" P/ogl_wTmbg dTannels br an arTtelT/_abput

corTfll_'Uled br

CABLE win tiske sLbst_sntia/lybnger than for aft antenna/fTput

confl_qumd for ANTENIVA

This i;_noiTna// howevel; once

d}annd

pFo_r_,fTTiTT/Rg

IScorrlpleted jlOtJ shou/cJnot have to

r_/:)eatthe pfogl>7lTIm/£g

processac_a/n

your Cabb TV

sel_//eelineup c'haeulesSidln/ficlmtly

* If you have a C,'nI?/eCARDinserted (page 12) channel

progmnffrTifW for ANT 7 £ dlsabled becnuse tile C'rsb/eC_ARD automatie_ffly loads _tle (2@le d}annd listin/<he TV_ d?annd

memosy

To program channels automatically:

1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.

See page 4() _br de_ails.

2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.

3. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new se_ of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen.

4. Open the TERRESTRIAL meat, highlight CHANNEL

PROGRAM, and press ENTER.

5. HighIight ANT 1 or ANT 2, depending on which antenna input 5ou want

to

program channds fi._r,and then press

ENTER

to

start automatic cham_d programming.

[(_

Scanni_/g cham/÷ls pleage wait

ANT I Antenna

_N_vigate

The TV

will

amomafically cycle d_rough

all

d_e channels channels in the channel memor> Whib _he TV is wring through the channds, the message "Scanning channds, please wait" appears (as shown above righ0.

To cancel channel programming, eid_er press EXIT or highlight ABORT in d_e on-screen disphy and press

ENTER.

When ch;mnd programming is done, press

CHANNEL _ or _ to xiew d_e programmed cham_ds.

<72 @

Channel

Numbers

CHANNEL A

]_/front touchpad

VOLUME MENU

w rsn:;

POWER

÷

HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AN rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04, 2:03 PM

41

[

NanuaRy adding and deUet[ng channNs

in the channeU memory

Af'_er you have programmed fl_echarmds a_L[omaficaIIy, can mammHy add or ddete individual cham_ds in the cham_d meinor},.

To add or delete channels in the channel memory:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP memo.

2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new se[ of INSTALLATION metal icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3).

3. Open d_e TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight CHANNEL

ADD/DELETE, and then press ENTER.

Here: ff you have a cable box cofTfTeetedto ANT 1 du//ng

71/Guide On Sc'/_en setup, the 'FERRESTRIALmenu win not

be accessihb and you must then u'_e the T1/Guide

On .lc,/_e/1channd editor to aobZde/ete dTanne/s

To add a channel to the channel memory:

Highlight the unchecked box next to d_e charred number you want to add, and d_en press ENTER [o check the box.

To manually add digital subchannds on a physical channel:

Use the Chatmel Numbers and d_e Dash (-/100) on the remote controI to enter the cham_d number (tbr exampIe,

56-1).

If[he charmel is fi.mnd,the rmmber will be added to the 1is[ and d_e box will be checked.

If d_e cha*md is not tbund, a message will appear.

To remove a channel from the channel memory:

Highfigh[ d_e checked box next to the charred ntm_ber you want to remove, and then press ENTER to tmcheck the

I)OX.

To save your new settings:

Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To revert

to

your original settings:

Highfigh[ CANCEL and press ENTER before saving.

To remove all channels from the channel memory:

Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER, and d_en highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

Note:

* T/fis artier ap_ie'_ to/7?e current antenna input o///jz

To delete/add dlanne/s on the othe_ iepuf, hi@@ht

"

Thisactk)f_cannotbecance/ledun/essyouh_jh@ht

CANCEL and press ENTER before say/rig your d)arlges

4. The iHus[rafion bdow shows chamlds programmed l%r the

ANT 1 antenrm inptm To view the list ofcharmds programmed tbr the ANT 2 an[emm input, highlight

CHANGE ANTENNA and press ENTER,

÷

HM94(E)048

2

42

Copyright @)2804 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_[ON.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 2:03 PM [

A

÷ L

Programmingyourfavorite channels

5qnl can program a maximum of 18 of your t_worite charmds

(9 fTom the ANT 1 irxptlcand 9 fTom ti_eANT 2 irlp_tt) into the

Favorite CharmeIs sets (_wo sets of trine f_vorite chaurlds). Yott can then scan through your flworite chaurMs only, skipping other chaurMs yott do not r_ormally watch.

To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels lists:

1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES memt.

2. Highlight FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.

3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.

4. To add the channel to the Favorite Channels set:

Use the A_'4 _ btlrcons to highlight an tmchecked box new co a charred you wan; co set as a t_worite, and then press ENTER to check the box.

To delete the chanuel from the Faw_rite Channels set:

Highlight a checked box and press ENTER to tmcheck it.

To clear your favorite channel lists:

1. Press MENU and open the

PREFERENCES li_entl.

2. Highlight

FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.

3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.

4. Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER.

5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:

Press FAV CH AV.

Note: _9 _uneyour Dmodte channe/_ fo_ the other antenna

input, you

will need to change No It?put.S_lectiof7

ANT mode bs_:

To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a ninepicture multbwindow (for the current ANT input):

Press FAV SCAN. See page 75 for derails.

Note:

_>

tloTe to ;;,chafTrlelfroMs7the FAVS(;ANmode hiqhl/_'hta

window (win be oulTined with a green botde/) a/ld press ENTER

Toscanyoulf_vof#echannei'__foftheot/Telantenl_a/rlput, youwi//

I_eed

_b

d?ai_ge dTe&put Selection to the o#lef A NTmode b_ lf)<_u try to add more than 9 flworite charmds per anterma input, an error message appears.

You will need to desdecc a chaur_el betore you can add another.

>

When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

6.

To program fi_w)ritechaurMs tbr the other antenrm irlptm

FitDer._ Highlight ANT 1 or ANT 2, which will change the flworite charred semngs ir_the stetted input. (This will riot change the TV's current input.)

Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1 or ANT2, and then repeat steps 1-6.

ChannelNumbers

Dash

(-)

A

FAVCHA_ i FAVSCAN

Tlal_NIN_

CT4_CCle

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,

43

HM94(E)O40-43(6a-Setup)

43

÷

8/31/04, 2:04 PM r

÷

A

÷ L

The TheaterNet fbature allows you to control many brands of"

IEEE-1394 and/or infrared rernote<ontrolDd A/V devices through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV's remote control

Note:

Ah'hol_qh

the777eaterNet screen devke

fem'uze unable

thefeatul>son that

device, use

thedevice_ remotecontlo/of the

COfTtfel!_

Of 7 the

device

For IR pass thmt\qh device control bfo/mation, see "('onnecting

kFmmd remote cof?tlo//ed

(Jel/ioes to the/R

OUT[/Jol<" Oll page

2 7

Open the DEVICES menu, highlight THEATER NET

DEVICES, and then press ENTER.

Navigate _Se]ect _t3.ck

_,_E×Jt

The TheaterNeE Setup menu opens.

Setting up

TheaterNet

AII de, ice types except IEEE-1394 require the fblh)wing seRtp process befbre you can contro_ them using the TheaterNet on-screen icons.

AH CompatibD IEEE-1394 devices are atnomaticaIIy recognized by the TheaterNeE fbature and do not require setup.

Note: .Seepnge 22 for det_dsabout the IEEE 1394per> IfyoL/_

/EEE 1394deviceisf}ot recognized

throtJgh

the IEEE 1384po£ or

ffTletJ_h

{lie

7heaterNetfentu/_,it maybe possibleto set it up tot IR

To set up TheaterNet device control:

1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared remote-controlled device(s). See page 21 for details.

2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menm

3. HigNight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of'INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 4).

5. Using the _t _ buttons, sdect the INPUT the device is connected to.

Note:

Ygher7the input/s change< all unsaved settings

Jvi/Ibe lost

6. Press V and then *__ to sdect the device TYPE.

7. Press _' and then @_ to sdecr the device BRAND

Note:

Whorl selecting a tlew brand, the IR oode will/)e set

I_) 7ere

8. Press _' and then *__ to sdect the device's IR code.

9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.

If the desired IR code is not in the list, press V and use the

ChamM Number buttons to enter the device IR code.

Note:

_)u can find tile IR code _)r you/ device in the

oil sc/_en list or k7the 2?eaten\let device ooo'e t_bb of 7

pages 4U 48

10, Highlight TEST and press ENTER to test whether the device responds to the code.

If"the device does not respond to the code, repeat steps

8 and 9 using another code for the same device.

11. When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To remove a device from TheaerNet:

1, Follow steps 1-5 above.

2. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.

3. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

÷

44

HM94(E}O4Z

-51(6b-Setup}

44

Copyright @)2904 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

A[] rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

[

A

÷ L

Setting up and using TheaterNet'Mon-screen device control (co.ti..ed)

Using the TheaterNet control icons

1. Sec up 3x}urir_liared devk'es in TheaterNet, if3x}tthave not already done so (see page 44).

Note:

I_EE 1394 devices do not need to be set up in

Theate_fl/et because they appea_ mltomatiea//y its the

Theatet#'et menu (7_sshown in step 3 bebw)

2.

Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device central sebcdon screem

The fblhnving are exampbs of'the TheacerNet on-screen control icons fbr _arious devices.

7bshibaSyrnbid'_AVHDrecordercontrol*

_ff

connected a F_shba

SVmSiO'M

AVHD mcotdef; you

must set up t/_e TV Gukle On Screen system in o_(le__buse

the SyfFib/o_ full

[ttdfTOflT)fTa//t_/._ee

O'h_lpter

5 for dot;Ills on settitW up the TV GukTe On Sc/een system See pages 23

8ild 49 for fufthef det;ff/s d_OtdtAVHD dig/tW moofUefs

_, _o®®

J DEVICE

CTRL

__=, {7_3

3, Usirig c}_e at,V@ _ buttons, highlight the device you want co central and press ENTER,

_ll

¢' Video1

1

0

_ Video 3 ColorStream HD1

ColorStream HD2

]

_

*'_ [ Toshiba

Video 2

4. The input automatically changes to the inpttt fbr d_e sebcted device and the device's concrd icons display.

ft;!

]

_7

..................

Highlight the icon f'or the fimcdon you want

co

control and press ENTER,

To select the device's control icons directly:

Press CTRL.

To close the on-screen control icons:

Press EXIT.

To view another source:

Press DEVlC_E and sebcc the input source you want co view.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

HM94(E)O44-51(6b-Setup) 45

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

45

r

÷

A

÷

TheaterNet = i R device cedes

Brand

Aiwa

Bose

C'at-ver

Curds Mathes

Denon

GE

H m_ m/Kardon

JVC

Lea Co_st

gi*m guxman

Magn avox

Ma_:antz

NEC

Nak mdchi

Opdm us

Panasonic

Parasotm d

Philips

Pioneer

Polk Audio

RCA

Re_Iisdc

Sansui

Shtire

Sony

Sotmdesigl_

Technics

Victor

Wards

Km_aM

Memo_cx

Motoroh

Oak

Pace

Panasonic

Paragon

Phtips

Pioneer

PuMr

Qtmsar

Cable boxes

Brand

ABC

Americ_st

Bell & Howell

Bell South

( crater

Director

Everquest

Gem ini

(_-ener_IInstrm_ent

GoldSEar

H m_lin

Hita ch i

Hytex j _sco jerrold

Code

0003, 0(}08,

{11014,

0007,

0011,0017

0899

0014

(t899

0019

0476

0015

0015

0476, (}003, 0276,

0011, 0810

0144

0009, 0020, 0273

0011

0007

0015

0476, 0003, 0276,

0012, 0014, 0015,

0011, 0810

0000

11476, 11116,11276,

0810

0019, 00117

0237

0000, 0107

0000

0305, 0317

0877, 0144, 0533,

1877

0000

0000

46

Code

0406

0674

0269

0300

0160

0078

0892

0331

0892

0269

0165

0269

0892, 0321, 11269

0264

0321

0395, 0300

0308, 0521

0246

0892, (}269

0013, 0300

11892, 0269

03O0

0395

(}321

0264

(}689, 0220

0078, 0211

11308, 0521

0331

0078, (}(}13,0211

0354, 0133

Cable boxes (coat.)

Braed Code

RadioSM ck

Regal

Rembra*_dt

Rtmco

0015

0020, 0275, 0279

0011

0000

S_msung

Scientific Atlanta

Sig_al

Sign _ture sony

S_arcom

Srarg_te

Starquest

St_perc_ble

Tocom

Torx

Toshiba

T.a

United Artists

Zenith

00 ] 5

0015

0276

0012

0003

0000

0015

0007

0144

0877, 0008, 0017,

0477, 1877

0015

0011

1006

0003, 0015

0000, 0525, 0899

CD players

Braed

Aiv, a

Burmester

Code

0157, 0124

0420

(-.'alifbrni_ a_dio Labs 0029, 0£50!5

(2_rver 0157, 0179,11437

Classic

DKK

DMX Electronics

Denon

Emerson

Fisher

GPX

Garr_rd

Gel]exxa

H mna_ffKardon

Hita dl i

JVC

KLH

Kemvood

Koss

K_cll

LXI ginn

MCS

MTC

1297

0000

0157

11873, 0003

0305

0174, 0179, 1325

1296

0393, 0420

0032, 0305

0157, 017_.

0032

0072, 1294

1318, 1372, 1373

0681, 0826, 0626,

0028, 00 B.7,0190

1317

0157

0305

0157

0029

0420

Mag{]avov

Mar m_z

Miro

Mission

NSM

Nikko

O*_kvo

Opdmus

P_naso*dc

Parasound

Philips

Pioneer

Polk Audio

0157,

(}31}5

0626, 0029, 0157,

0180

0000

0157

0157

0174

0868, 0101

1063, 0000. 0032,

0037, 0145, 0179,

03115, 0420, 11437,

0468

0029, 0303

0420

0626, 0157

1063, 1062, 0032,

0305, 0468

0157

Realistic

R£_tel

SAE

Sansui

Sanyo

Scott

Sears

Sharp

Sherwood

Sonic Frontiers

Sol_y

Som_design

TDK

Tascam

Tctc

Tcch_dcs

Victor

\_rds

Yam d_a

Yorx

Brand

Proton

QED

Quastr

R( _A

Laser

disk

players

Brand Bode

Aiwa

Carver

0203

[)e_o_

Disco Vision

Ftmai

Ham_an/Ka_don

Hka&i

0064, 0194, 0323

0059, o 172

0023

0203

0194

0023

Mag_avox

N/I _ra1_tz

Mitsubishi

NAD

Opdm us

Pan,sonic

Philips

Pio_eer

2[kAkAudio

Qttasar

Realistic

Samstmg

Sega

Solly

Tech*dcs

Theta Digital

'f,mHha

0194, 0217

0064, 0194

0059

0059

0059

0204

0064, 0194

0059, 002B.

0194

0204

0203

0323

0023

0193, 0201

0204

0194

0217

Niseelaneoas audio g_and aiwa

Fisher

Code devices

0010,0159,04114

0(}52

0073

IVC

Jerrold

Scie_tific atl rata

0520,{)459

0460

Scnly

Sta[com

0010,([)159,0576

O459

Code

0157

0157

0029

1062 0032, 01153,

0179, 11305, 0468

0764

0179 018(), 0420 o

157, 0420

0157

0157, 0305

0179

0305

0305

0861 0037,0180

1067, 0180

0157

0490, 0000. 0100,

0185 0604, 1364

0145

1208

0420

0174,11180, 0393,

0420

0029, 0303

0072

0157 0053

0888, 0036, 0187,

1292

0461

Copyright @ 2904 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_[OH.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)O4Z

-51(6b-Setup)

46

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

L

÷

F

TheaterNef =I R device codes {co.t..ea]

Video accessory (RDTV decoder)

Brand

Code

Panasonic

Pioneer

PAn<eton

1120

1010

0113, 0295

Samsung

Sensory Science

8h_rp

1190

1126

1010

Receivers

Brand

ADC

Ahva

Alto

Anam

Apev Digital

Arc_m

Audiotronic

Audhwox

1257

1120

1189

1390

Bose 1229

Cambridge Soundw(_rks 1370

Capetronic

C_*ver

C'asio

Cladnette

0531

1089, 1189, 0042,

0189

0195

C'ompa q

Curds Mathes

D_ewoo

Denon

0195

1136

0080

1250

Fisher

G_rr_rd

H _rm m/Kardon

Hewlett P_ckard

11(}4, 116(1 0004,

136(}

(}(}42, 1801

0463

0110, 0189, 0891

1181

JBL

] VC

KLH

Kenwood

Koss

LX[ gasonic ghm

Code

0531

1(189, 1405 0121,

(1158, 0189, {11405,

1388, 1641

139(1

1609

0110, 1306

(}074, 1374

139O

131}, 1027, 1570,

1569, 0027, 0042,

(}186

1366

0181

1798

0189

Lloyd's

MCS

Magnavox

Ma_antz

Modul fire

MusicnHgic

Nak mAchi

Onkvo

Optim us

Pan:sonic

[bnnev

Philips

Pioneer

Polk Audio

0195

0039

1089, 1189, 0189,

(}195, (}391, 0531

1089, 1189, 00}9,

0189

0195

1089

0097

0135, 0842, 1298

1023, 0042, 0080,

0181, (/186, 0531,

(}670, 0738, 0801

1518, 0039, 0309,

(1367

0195

1089, 1189, 1269,

(}189, 0391 1120

1023, 0014, 0080,

0 ] 5(1,(}244, 0531,

(}63O, 1384

0189

Receivers {cont.}

Brand

Proscan

Quasar

RCA

Re distic

S:mstmg

Sansui

Smvo

Sharp

Sherwood

Sony

Soundesign

Stereophonics

Sun fhc

Tcac

Tcclmics

Thorcns

Venturer

Victor

Wards

Yam:ha

Yorx

Zenith

Code

1254

0039

1023, 1254, {)080,

0531 1390, 16{i}9

0181,0195

1295

1089, 0189

08()1, 1251

0186, 1286

0491 05(/2, 1653

1058, 1258, 1158,

0158, 0474, 1367,

1558, 1658,1758

0670

1023

1313

0463

1308, 13(/9, 1518,

0039, 0}09

1189

1390

0074

0014, 0080, 0158,

0189

0176, 0186, 1176

0195

0857

Satellite receivers

Brand

Code

Alph_Smr

( haparral

Crossdigkal

Dish P_:o

Echostar

Expmssvu

GE

Proscan

RCA

RadioSMck

SKY

0772

0216

1109

1005, 0775

1005, 0775

0775

0566

GO[

General [nstrument

HTS

Hita ch i

0775

0869

0775

0819

HughesNetworkS)_tvms 1142

JVC (}775

Magnavov

Memore×

0749, 1749

0724,

0724

0722

Mksubishi

Motoroh

New Level

Panasonic

Pays_E

Philips

0749

0869

0869

0247,

0701

0724

1142,

0749,{i}724,

1076,

0392

0722,1749

0392,

0143

0869

0856

0566,(}855,

Sre]sung

Sony

Star Choice

T{}shiba

Uniden

Zenkh

11()9

0639

0869

0749,

1053,

1286,

0790,1052,

1054,1285,

1287,1289,

1749

0724, 0722

0856, 1856

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFIATION, All rights reserved,

VCRs

Brand

Admiral

Adventur_

Aiko

Aiwa

Akai

America Action

Code

0048, ()209

0000

0278

0037, 0000

0041

0278

0035

0240

America_ High

Asha

Audbvox

Beaumark

Bell & Howell

Broksonic

0037, 0278

0240

0104

0184, (}121,0209,

0(1(12,(}479, 1479

0072 0278

0037

CCE

C'alix

(2_non

Carver

Cineral

C'kizcn

Colt

Craig

Curds M:thes

0035

0081

0278

0037, 0278, 1278

0072

0037, 0047, ()240,

0072

0060, 0035, 0162,

0041, 0760, 1035

0240

Cybernex

Daewoo

Denon

Dvn_tech

Electrohome

Electrophonic gmercx gmersol_

0045 0278, 1278

0042

0000

0037

0037

0032

0037 0184, 0000,

0121,004 }, 0209,

0002 0278, 0479,

1278, 1479

Fisher

Fuii

Funai

0047 0104

0035, O033

0000

GE

0(16(},0035, {)240,

0760, 0807, 1(135,

1060

Garr_rd

Go Video

0000

0432

GoldSmr

(}r_dbn_e

0037, (10}8, 1237

0000

0047

HI-Q

Harley D:vidson

M_gnasonic

0000

H:rman/Ka_don

H_rwood

HeadqtHr_er

Hkadfi

HughesNetwork!3stems

0042

IVC

0067 0041

Jellsei1

0041

KEC

KLH

Keen

Kenv, ood

Kodak

EXI

Lloyd's

0081, 0038

0072

0046

0000, (}042, 0041

0037, 0278

0072

0693

0067, 0041,0()38

0035 0037

0037

0000

Logik

MEI

MGA

M(;N Technology

MTC

0072

0035

024(L 0043

0240

0240, 0000

1278

HM94(E}044-51(6b-Setup) 47

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

47 r

÷

A

÷

TheaterNet I R device codes Ccomi..ea)

VCRs (cont.}

Brand

Magnavox

Magnin

Mar _ntz

Marta

Matsushita

Memore×

Minoka

Mitsubishi

Motorola

Muldtech

NEC

Nikko

Noble×

Olympus

Optimus

Orion

Panasonic

PenneT

Pentax

Philco

Philips

Pilot

Pioneer

Polk Audio

Prof]tronic

Proscan

Prorec

Pulsar

Quarter

Quartz

Quasar

P,CA

RadioSt_ _ck

Radix

Randev

Realistic

ReplayTV

P,unco

STS

S mlsung

Sanky

Sansui

Sanyo

Code

0035 (/039, 0081,

0000, 0149, 056 _.,

1781

0240

0035, 0081

0037

(}035, 0162, 0454

0035, 016Z 0037,

(1048, (}039, 0047,

0240, 0000, 0104,

0209, 0(}46, 0454,

0479, 1037, 1162,

1237, 1262

0042

0067, 0043, 0807

00}5, 0048

0000, 0072

0 I04, 0067, 0041,

0038

0037

0240

(}(}35

1062, (1162, 0037,

0048, 0104, (}432,

0454, 1048, 1162,

1262

0 ] 84, 0209, 0{)02,

0479, 1479

1062, 0035, 0162,

0225, 0454, 0616,

1035, 1162, 1262

0035, 0(/37, 0240,

0042, 0038, 1035,

1237

0042

0035, 0209, 0479

0035, 0081, {11618,

1(181, 1181

(1037

0067

0081

0240

0060, 0760, 1060

0072

(}039

0046

0046

0035, (/162, 0454,

1035, 1162

0060, 0240, 0042,

0149, 0760, (}807,

1035, 1060

0000, 1037

(1037

0037

0035, 0(/37, 0048,

0047, 0000, 0104,

0046

(1614, 0616

(}(}39

0042

(}240, 0(}45

0048, 0039

0000, 0067, 02(/9,

0041,0479, 1479

0047, 0240, 0104,

(}(}46

VCRs (cont.}

Brood

Scott

Se_rs

Setup

Sharp

Shintom

Shogun

Singer

Sonic Blt_e

Sony

Sylvmi_

Code

0184, 0045, 0121,

0043

0035, 0037, 0047,

0000, 0042, 0104,

0046, 1237

0045

0048, 0807, 0848

0072

0240

0072

06 ] 4, 0616

0035, (/032, 0000,

0033, 0636, 1032,

1232

0035, (/081,0000,

0043, 1781

Symphonic

TMK

0000

0240

Tamng

Tuac

Technics

Tcknika

Thomas

Tivo

Toshiba

Totevision

U*fitech

Vector

Vector Research

Video Concepts

Videom _gic

Videosonic

Vilhin

Wards

0041

0000, 0()41

0035, 0162

0035, 0037, 0000

0000

0618, 06}6

(}045, 0043, (}845

0037, 0240

0240

0045

0038

0045

0037

(}24(}

0000

0060, 00 _.5,0048,

0047, (/081,0240,

0000, 0042, {)(}72,

0149, 0760

White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278

XR_ 1000

Yam_ha

0035, 0000, 0072

0038

Zenith 0(139, 0000, {:1209,

0033, 0479, 1479

DVD pmayers

Brand

Aiwa

Apex Digital

Audiolog[c

B & K

B] ue Parade

Broksonic

DVD2000

Daewoo

Denon

Emerson

Enterprise

Fisher

GE

GPX

Go Video

Gradiente

G wenhill

H_rman/Kardon

Code

0641

0672, (/717, 0755,

0794, (}796, 0797,

0830, (/856, 1100

0736

0655, 0662

0571

0695

0521

0784

0490, 0634

0591

0591

0670

0522, 0717

0699, 0769

0715

0651

0717

0582, 0702

48

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

DVD players (cent.}

Bk,_nd

Hkachi

H[teker

JB>

Code

0573, 0664

0672

0702

0558, 062 _.,0867 jvc

KLH

Kenwood

0717

049(I, 05 _.4,0682

0737

Konka

Koss

Lasonic

Magnavox

Maitre

]_{aralltz

Microsoft

Mint&

Mksubishi

Nesa

New Base

Norcellg

Onkvo

Orkron

Panasonic

Philips

Pioneer

Iblk Audio

Pdnceton

Proscan

RCA

Rotel

Sampo

Samsung

Sansui

Satlyo

Sharp

Sherwood

Shinsonic

Sony

Sylvmi_

Technics

Techwood

Thet_ Digital

Toshiba

Ticdex

Urhan

Concepts

XBox

0711, 0719, 0720,

0721

0651

0798

0503, 0675

0782

0539

0522

0717

0521

0717

0826

0872

0503, 0627

0651

0490, (/632, 1362,

1462, 1490

0503, 0539, (1646,

0854

(1525, 0571, (1632

0539

0674

0522

0522 (1571, {11717,

0822

0623

0823

0698

0573, 0820

0695

0670

0630

O633

0533

0533, 0864, 1533

0675 {:}821

0490

0692

0571

0503, 0695, 1045

0800

0503

0522

HM94(E)04z

-51(6b-Setup/

48

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

[

L

÷

Setting the AVHD device skip time

When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive) device, such as the Toshiba Symbio _''AVHD recorder (modal

160HD4), to one of the TV's IEEE-1394 ports, you can use the

AVHD device skip time Dature to set the number of minutes the device will skip fbrward or backward when you press the

SKIP buttons.

Note:

This TV will wo_? best with tile 7_>shiba

Svm_o

'_'AVHD _eco_der

(inode/760HD4],

fo_ _ecofding h/_/h definitkm and standard de_7._itionqlatelfal f?olTi e/filer tiJne/ arid for contfol/ie£j five 71/

(pauseJf_wied/etc)

VVhe/1the AVHD mcotdet /s connected to the

TIt, tile remote contlo/ ke_s (LIVE, ST-DRREW, PAUSE, #LAY, e/c)

af_ automatically actiw_ted to a/low p¢_usiegof live T1/

ff you connect a _)shba _l_[o 'MAI/HD t_cotdel; you must set up i'he FV Guide On .%'/_en sj/__ternis/order to use d?eSyfntJio _ Pd//

functiona/iB/ See Chapter 5 tot details on settilW up the TV Guide

On Sc'/een system See pages 23 and 49 [or _ufthet dehff/s about

AVHD d_?ta/ f_cotdet_

• I/Vhen you connect all AVHD (or a D VNS) device the TV Guide

On Sc'/een systern 1:_automatk-a/ly conf_jumd to allow mcof_ling

.lee page P._'for device connection bteimation .lee Chaptels 5

and 7 f_._rdetails about setting up and usi/w the TV Guide (Jn Screen system

To set the AVHD device skip time:

1. Press MENU and open the

"

2. Highlight AVHD SKIP

TIME and press ENTER.

3. Press W or A to select the

AVHD skip time and press

ENTER.

Setting the

HDMP' audio mode

To select the HDMI audio mode:

1,

Press MENU and open the

_, _ /_

_ _,

2,

Highlight HDMI AUDIO

SELECTION and press

ENTER.

,

Press V or A to select the

HDMI audio mode (Auto,

Digital, or Analog) and press ENTER. (Auto is the recommended mode).

See '%orH_ecdr_gan HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input" on page 19.

Setting the time and date

Note: ff you a#eady set up the TV GukJe On Screen

SJ/sten?, the

i'ime and cl_£ewere set automatically and you cnn skip this step

To set the time and date:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.

2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)

3. Open the TIME AND DATE merlu, highlight

START SETUP, and press ENTER.

/

Navigate _Select [,_gack _/_E×it

If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen system, the

[blIowing screen will appear. To se_ the time, highlight

TV GUIDE ON SCREEN and press ENTER. The TV

Guide On Screen setup sequence will start, and the time and date will be set au[omaticall>

Note:

/fyou highlight TV GU/DF ON SCREEN (uhove) to set the i'iole and date thmlLgh the TV Guide On Sc/een sysl_m arid a

powe/ outage occult:, the t#ne and date wi// be updated

automal%,a//y when i'he powe/ is f_stof_d

ffyou h/igh/iqht MANUAL (above) to set the time and dare manually and a power outage occult, you will lose the _/ine

and date se??ingswhen the power is f>stot>d

ff}/ou manually set the time and dm'e and then perform TV

Guk/e On St'teen setup, the manual/fine and dglte settings

will be ovefifotJen /)y the T1/ Guk_'eOn Sc/een settings

49

HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)

49

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04, 2:09 PM

[

÷

Viewingthe CaNeCARD" menu

A CableCARD enables you to view encrypted digital channds,

See page 12 fbr connection and subscription infbrmation,

After the CableCARD is inserted, a CabIeCARD option appears in the APPLICATIONS rnenu, with informationaI screens provided by your digital CableCARD service (see illustrations below).

Setting the Quick Restart feature

With the Quick Restart fbature set to ON, the TV stays in Low

Power Shutdown mode fbr several minutes after the TV is turned off (see Notes below).

If the TV is turned on fl'om Low Power Shutdown nmde, the flu11picture appears immediatdy.

To set the

QMck

Restart feaure:

1. Press MENU, and then press "_ or II_until the SETUP menu appears.

2. Press A or _' to highlight QUICK RESTART, and then press ENTER.

3. A side menu will displa> Highlight one of the side menu items and press ENTER

to

display the infbrmadon.

g

To view the CableCARD menu:

1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS

2.

Highlight

CableCARD and press ENTER.

menu,

3. A side menu will display. Highlight one of the side menu items and press ENTER to display the information.

Note:

Yhe (?_bloCARD menu has no use_ a@_stab/e options

af?dIS

lot/f?_)fmS_/_)f?_J/DtOf)OSeS

OI)l_Z

Note:

ff (2uiek Rest_tt is set ib OFF and you tlee off the Tk' it cnn take

severn/seconcZs for the p/ctle e to appeat when you tlee on i'he

TV agab

If C),uickRestn_tis set to ON and you turn off the TI_ the following will occur fo_ a tow minutes

The semen (bffW lights dim/3z

"

Tile

_21]s COfTtiF]Ue _0 ftJl?

This is a function ell<he Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown Inocle

and is not a TV maffunction

/@ou do not pro?e/this, set I'he Quicl(

Restart featu/ e to OH_

W_en the Quick Restrict teattJf_ is set

_)

OFF, i@ou mpeatedlv turn the TV of?and off ill a short pedod of trine, rite useful so?vice/if,_ of

the/_ffnp m_y be d_orte/ _'hanthe average usdu/ service life See

page 98

÷

50

HM94(E)04z

-51{6b-Setup)

50

Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_ION.

All rights reserved.

÷

8131/04, 2:10 PM

F

Viewingthe digital signal meter Viewingthe system status

Yolt can _iew d_e digkal sigrml meter fbr ANT 1 and ANT 2 digkal TV input sources only.

To view the digital signal meter:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP men,.

Z HigNight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of INSTALLATION men. icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)

To check the system status:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP merit:.

2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of'INSTALLATION memt icons will appear on-screen, as shown iri step 3),

3. Open the SYSTEM STATUS menu, highlight SYSTEM

INFORMATION, and then press ENTER.

3. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, high[ight SIGNAL

METER, and press ENTER.

_Navigate _NSelect _,_Y_Back

4. Use the _ _ buttons to scroll through the memt bar to check the Product Inf_)rmation and Sof'rware Version.

_Navigate K_tSelect _J_Sack _;._Exit

4, Use the AV4 _" buttons to sdect the ar_terma input and digital chamld whose signal you want to check.

Note; The

phi/sited

4//iq/tgd channel numbe_ &ted in tl_e5;ignal

Mete/ screenmay not co_mspondto a vi£ual FVchannel

/lumbet: Contactyour /oca/bmadcastet__) obtgdnthe RF channd numbe/stot your local d/9'/ta/s_alYof?s

To close the screen and return to the TERRESTRIAL menu:

Highlight OK and press ENTER.

To rett_rn to normal viewing:

Press EXIT.

To close the screeu arid return to the INSTALLATION menu: Highlight OK and press ENTER.

To return to normal viewing: Press EXIT.

Restore Factory Defa_Rs

To restore a[[ se_dngs and cham_ds to their f_ctory def_ttlt

_a[ttes:

1. Follow steps 1-3 aboxe.

2. Use the @ _ buttons to scroll through the menu bar to sdect FACTORY DEFAULTS.

3. The screen bdow [eft appears. Enter your PIN code (or

0000 if"no PIN code has been set). T'he screen bdow right appears.

To cancel the reset: Highlight NO and press ENTER.

To continue the reset process: Highlight YES and press

ENTER. The TV svill tttm off automatically af'_era fbw seconds. Af'_erthe TV turns off',tmpIug the TV power cord and then pltig it in again to complete the restore.

HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)

This window provides the ability to reset the TV settings•

Type in your PiN now (ol "0000" if no PiN has been set) to lestole settings to their actory de au t va ues.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8131/04, 2:10 PM

[A

PressYES to confilln After the TV tu,ns off, unp]u0 it and pk,0 it

51

[

÷

eracd e program

The TV Guide On Screepd_'_system is a flee, interactive, on-screen prograrn guide bulk in to your Toshiba TV d_at _ists schedules and infbrrnation fbr TV programs in your area.

Note: Ovet the 8if el eob/e 8cc'essto st;itio/F eotry/itg TV Guir/e

0/7 .%'_eer/dictais mqui/ed for tl£ TV Gukle On Sereen system to

o/)ef2ffe TV Gz/i(/eOn Sereee dath is t_otplow?led/)y 7&hi@ Ameffeo

()Ollst/mef R,educts, L L C

(TACP), therefore. TA('P is not bible br the

corgerg of sl/eh rl_t_t The dora provider m;!y e/eet to discorgirll/e the

sefvic_ or it may cease to be (or never be) avoi/oble i/_yeul area b a/y

of these e//eumst_tnee&the TV &l/de Of7Sereen featl/fe will not fu/Idbn

consequences arising,hem customers havieg used or net beif_gable to t/se t/?/s sel v/ce

The TV Guide On Screen s) stern includes d_e following f:oatures

Streamlined

on-screen assisted setup--QuickIy and easiIy see up your TV Guide On Screen system using the on-screen prompEs (see '_Set@_gup the TV Guide On Screen system" beIow).

Prepare listings"and INFO wk_dows--Scroll

through eight days of TV listings and view program informauon such as rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.

. _tch

TVand

display TV Guide ()n &teen inf!_rmation simultaneous@

* Channd

lin_up customization--Customize

D_eup so 3>mrfiworite stations are listed first.

your cha*md

DDect tuning--Direct?

tune the TV to a current program

3>_uwant to watch by selecting it in the program guide.

Reminders--Schedule

show reminders that wilI either di@ay an (m-screen notification harmer or automadcaIIy rune the TV to the channd of"the show tbr which }_m see d_e reminder.

Recording--Easily

schedule recording of one or more programs.

@viee

f equi/ed for rec'of_Lc_.q

instmdk)ns in CIwpter 2

: Search_Search for shows by category, keyword, or alphabetically,

" On-screen hdp--The TV Guide On Screen system contains on-screen tcamre definitions and navigation insmlcfions.

To open the TV Guide On Screen system:

While watching TV, press the TV GUIDE buttopl on the remote controk

--or--

H_ql

* Press MENU, open the

APPLICATIONS menu, higNight TV GUIDE

ON SCREEN, and press

ENTER.

Setting up the TV Guide Oil Screen system

Follow these instructions to set up d_e TV Guide On Screen system so it can receive current program data fbr your area.

Note:

If you move the TV tea different ZIP/post./code,

you will need to petfoltn the TV GU/DE ON SCREFN SETUP process to

mcon@um your 71/Guide On Sc/_erl system

If you have

not

already connected your antenna, cable box, aud/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection instructions.

1,

Press MENU and open the SETUP memo

2,

Highlight INSTALLATION and then press ENTER to open d_e INSTALLATION menus. (A new set of'menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 4 beloxv)

Open d_e TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SETUP menu, higNight START, and _hen press ENTER.

mcof_l/r]g

clev/ee tO

use the TV Guide On .S'c'/_er,,sj/_ste,

one to_/c'htecotd//W feature It is mt;omtl_ended t/?atyc)tJ con/_ect your dev/ees according to the connection bstmct/ons

in CI}_g)ter 2

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revisio_ of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibRed o_der the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, a_d may sabieet you to civil and criminal liability,

!

{:{

Navigate }_}8elert _gack k_Exit

4. Go to Chapter 3 tbr instrucuons on completing the setup,

Read this chapter fbr details on using the TV Guide

On Screen interactive program guide.

52

HM94(E)O5_-55(7a-TVG) 52

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA][ON.

All rights reserved.

_ 8/31/04, 2:20 PM

[

÷

A

÷ L

Navigating the TV Guide On Screensystem

While

watching

TV, press

d_e TV GUIDE button to enter the TV Guide v_,_

On Screen system. The w.¢_

LISTINGS screen will appear with the current show highlighte&

When in the TV Guide

On Screen system, if.you press d_e TV GUIDE button from any screen the TV will tune to the show displayed in the Video

Window.

c_,0,:_

,:._

'_',,,r,_

Use the arrow keys on the remote control (AV"_ _) to highlight any show, and then press ENTER to tune to d_at

sho'vv,

Scroll left or right (_ _) p_, a¢_ to view eight days of listings, c_,__,,_u_v;,

Press MENU to display a pand menu wkh options fbr the currendy highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders,

To access another Service screen:

1, Press A to highlight the Service Bar.

2. Press _1 or _" to highlight a difffrent Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,

SETUR SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).

3, Press Y to use that Service.

Note:

Helpful/?/om_at/on about each Sefv/ce appeats /?_the/rite Box

TV Guide On Screen remote control functions

BUTTON

TV GUIDE

Numbers

- (digital separator)

MENU

INFO

ENTER

_. _'_i _

PAGE U P/DOWN

REC

SPLIT and 1_

FUN(,_ION

• When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen system and higblights tbe current show listing.

. Wben in the 11/Guide On Screen system, returns to watching TV and displays the sbow in the

Video Window.

• For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and cbannel editing,

• For entering digital cbannel numbers.

.

Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind, keyword).

• Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Sewice screen or otber type of screen.

, Makes a selection or executes an action.

, With a currently airing show listing high@hted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the sbow channel.

• Witb a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu witb viewing options.

• Provide directional control.

• When watcbing TV, _. and _' provide surfing through cbanneb turned ON in tbe LISTINGS screen.

• When in tbe TV Guide On Screen system, moves from one set of scleen infornlation to the next, when applicable.

° When in tbe TV Guide On Screen system or watching TV, initiates tbe recmding process.

• Wben in the TV Guide On Screen system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video

Window.

•Jurnp forward and backward one day in the UST]NGS screen.

- (digital separatoO

MENU

-

IV GUIDE

PAGE

DOWN

_'_ and _ -

REC

-

SPLIT-

9v9 [UN

PICMOD_

, :_,_,#e

Note:

o fllB TV &side On 5"creen rllenus sl_own in ff_ls manual ale fol

iNustratlon pu/T£)ses only The channels, pfogm/71s, and

TV &side On &>men in_Jmlatlon

as illushated m_v not be

avail;_ble in your area Flee options and _earules as illustf_#ed

af_ sulJjeot to ehaBge /vhen UfPd;ffms are downloaded hem the

fV

&did{¢

OnScreenservicereyou/TV

The TV Guide On Screen intefadiwe pfo_/mm

gLlide_ supf_oH5

eYe, the all broadcast3/t

does not pmwde

//stings _of satellite

servIceS

Numbers

© ® ®

® ® ®

[WD CLEA£

FAVSOAN FR_ZE

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

53

HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG) 53 _ 8/31/04, 2:20 PM [

÷

A

÷ [

* When

you

open the

TV Guide On Screen s3%tem,the current program appears in d_e Video Window.

As you scroll through the listings, the Video

Window wi[[ change

to

display d_e sdected program.

The bck/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.

You can set the Vide<)Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to change chamlds (unlocked) as you navigate d_rough listings.

To lock/unlock the Video Window:

Press the SPLIT button on d_e remote control to toggle between locking and unlocking d_e Video Window.

--or--

Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press

MENU to display the opdon to lock/unlock the Video Window.

Panel Nenus

A panel rnerm appears:

- when }<mpress MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options are avaihble); or

- when you press ENTER on a show starring in the furore.

- when F)u press VCR+ while watching TV (when the TV Guide On

Screen is not open).

When a pand naenu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.

* Press Eodisplay hdp tbr d_e current pand menu,

* Press A and V to move among the options.

. Press _ and _" to move u) adjacent options or, ifd_e highlight is on a odometer, to change the odometer choice.

* To move the highlight to the deflmh command burton, press ENTER f'rom an odometer or entry box.

* To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the command buEEonand press ENTER.

. To cancel any changes and close d_e panel menu:

- press MENU; or

- highlight Cancd and press ENTER.

* Ira panel menu contains more options d_an can be displayed in one pand, the word "more" appears at the bottom of the menm To access d_e additional options, eid_er scroll down using the Y button or d_e

PAGE UP/DOWN (CH AT) burton.

54

Default

Buitor_

Odometel

Copyright @?2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORAEION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)O5J-55(7a-TVG) 54 _ 8/31/04,

2:20

PM

Info Box

ParcelMenu

[

÷

A

÷ L

lnfo Bo×

An Irffb Box contains irffbrmafi(m abo_E a show, Service, or Pand Ad, or provides genera_ he_p (for example, f{.}ra pane_ menu).

, An hlf'o Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have ttp to three sizes: Small, Large, or '{No/'

- Press INFO on the remoEe controI to cyde among the sizes.

- The defiuk Infb Box size is SmaIl. To change the defauk size, open the

SETUP Service screen.

The hffb Bu_Eonicon ( _ iNFO)appears on tI_eInfo Action Bar ifd_e hffb

Box size can chai_ge and/or if there are addkional hffb screens. Press the

][NFO key on the remo_e control to change the size and/or to display additional hffb screens.

][nsome instances, the INFO bttrton on the remote control is used to page fbrward (fbr exampM if there are additional pages ofirffbrmation in a Pand

Ad, a Channd Ad, or hdp text).

Bar

Small hffo Box

/

Large hffo Box

TV

Guide On Screen icons

1{20N NAME

Info Button

DESCRIPTION

° Additional h_foBox infom_ation is available, or the hfo Box has additional sizes.

Progress

Elapsed time in currerlt show.

• Progress bar appears in LISTINGSand SEARCHand when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.

HDTV • Show is presented in high-definition TV,if available.

New

Stereo

• Show is new O_ota repeat}.

° Show is available in stereo.

[xl

DIGITAL

Dolby Digital , Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).

CC , Closed captioning is available for the show.

TV Rating ° TV rating for the show.

Record Once Show is set to Record Once.

° Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),

Regularly, and Weekly.

Record Off

_ _

• Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Record

Suspended

, Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

• Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

RemindOnce

°ShowissettoRemindOnce.

Regularly, and Weekly.

Remind Off

_ _

, Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Remind

Suspended

• Show is Suspended due to a schedtde conflict (show remains in Schedule).

° Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

_

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,

55

÷

TVGuideOn ScreenSe ices

The TV Guide On Screen system consists of five main services:

LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, arid SETUR

OfTIJ/ /OtJ[

LISTINGS screen

* When yott open theTV Guide On Screensystem,LISTINGS

is ahvays the first service

displayed.

* Use the Number keys on the remo_e control to jump to a specific cha*md's listings.

* To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press

ENTER.

* To dispIay the Episode Options pand menu fbr a particular show, highlight a show and press ITfENU.

* With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screen.

* Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS to do the fbllowing:

- View eight days of show listings

- Read show descriptions

-Ttme

direcdy to a show currendy airing

- Se_a show to Remind (e.g., start time, f'requency, automatic power ON, auto-tune TV)

- Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, f'requenc3O

- Lock arid unlock the Video Window

- Access panel ads arid cha*md ads

Episode Options panel menu

From the Episode Opdons pand metro, you can choose to see a recording, set a reminder, or tune to the cha*md. The fbllowing are descriptions of"the buttons.

GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the memt, changes rio irdbrmation, and returns to the Service Bar.

TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Gtfide

On Screen system and tunes _o _he channd of the highlighted show (if'the show airs in the ft_ure) or tunes to the show (if the show is currendy airing). The but_on label changes according to whether the show is currently airing or not.

SET RECORDING: DispIays the Record Options panel menu, f}'omwhich you can se_ the show to record. For additional infbrmafion, see "RECORDINGS screen" on page 59,

"SCHEDULE screen" arid "Record features" on page 60, and

"Remind features" on page 63.

SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel memo, fl'om which you can set a reminder fbr _he show. For additional infbrmafiori, see "SCHEDULE screen" arid '_Record [bamres" on page 6(t, and "Remind fbatures" on page 62.

CANCEL: CIoses the metro, changes rio infbrmation, and returns to the highlighted show.

56

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA3[ON.

A[] rights reserved.

÷

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

SEARCH screen

SEARCH allows you to find shows b.vkeyword or category

(alphabedcaI, HDTV, movies, sports, children, e&tcafional, news, _ariet)_ series).

Example:

Category

search

1. From the SEARCH screen, press Y to highlight a category

(in this example, MOVIES).

With SEARCH highlighted ir_the Service Bar, press INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO agairl to dose the screen.

2. Press V to highIight a sttbcategory (ir_this example, ALL).

Use d_e arrow keys to move d_e highlight wkhin SEARCH.

3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by date and time.

÷

4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now) or press MENU" to displa.vthe Episode Options panel menu. (See "Episode Options pand menu" on page 56.)

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

57

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

SEARCH screen (continued)

E×ample: Keyword search

Keyword search lets )ou enter a word(s) to find a partic_lar show by category or fbr every show title tha_ ma_ches.

1. From the SEARCH screen, highlighE KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the pand menu, and then

,tess ENTER.

6. A list of a[[ matching shows ft_r that keyword is dispkffed.

7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.

Then highlight a specific [isung and press ENTER to watch

(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options pand menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can choose to se_ a recording or reminder, or tune to the channel (see "Episode Options panel mentt" on page 56.)

,

The Search Options panel mepm opens. Highlight

CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a ca_egor.vto search (AI[, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).

.

After high[ighung a category, press V to highlight ENTER

KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

,

The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight a character and then press ENTER to display it. When finished entering a[[ characters, highlight DONE and press

ENTER.

The TV Guide On Screen system stores all tl_ekeywords you creaEe,

To edit or delete a keyword:

From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, high[igh_ the keyword you want to edit or ddete, and then press MENU to display the Search Opdons pand menu, with the fbllowing options:

- GO TO SERV_{CEBAR: C[oses the menu, changes no information, and returns to the Service Bar.

- EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you can change _he keyword.

÷

- DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmauon pand menu. Sdec_ YES to delete the search or NO to dose the pand menu.

- CANCEL: Closes the pand menu, changes no infbrmadon, and re_urns to the highlighted show.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

58

A

÷ [

TVGuideOn ScreenServices([continued)

RECORNNGS screen

The RECORDINGS service screen disphys a list of'previ<sly recorded or ct*rrentIy recording shows on an IEEE-1394 recording device connecEed to the TV (see ChapEer 2).

Note:

Rf--CORDIN(_S" will not appear kt tile .C,:e/viee J/ou

have an IEEE 1394 video fd.'nt c/irlg cJevieecnnnected to one of the

IEEE 7394 poft_ on tile. TI/._ee (_/lap2f 2 [or cJet_i/s

f--orackl/t/ong c/mr;J/s,see 'Red'old featu/es"on page 60

* With RECOR[)INGS highlighted h the Service Bar, press

INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screen.

To view a recording, you can do one of the following:

* Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The episode either starts fTom the begmnhg or fTom where it was last stopped (if viewed previot*sly).

Highlight an episode and press MENU to disphy the

Episode Options pant menu, with the fblbwing options:

- GO TO SERVI(-;E BAR: Cbses the mentl, changes no infbrmation, and returns to the Service Bar.

- RESUME: Starts from the beginrfing er f'rom where it was last stopped (if viewed previottsly).

- PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts f'rom the begmnhg, even if'stopped previottsly.

- DELETE EPISODE: Ddeces the episode from the

RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording fTem the

IEEE-1394 recording device. A Confirm panel taunt* displays. Press YES to ddete the episode or NO to close the pant menu.

- (;ANCEL: Closes the pant menu, changes no information, and rerttrns

to

the highlighted show.

To choose the way recordings are displayed:

1. Highlight RECORDINGS on

the

Service Bat', and press

MENU to disphy the Recording Options pant menu.

2. Press AV to choose between ViewAs and Sort By, as described bebw.

View As: Press @_

to

choose between the {bllowing:

List--Disphys every recorded episode {br a show (see example in Screen B, at right).

Note: It;Listview,higlJicdht

an

into

Box with dTow ifTfolrrlation Press MENU to c/Isp/aJl the

ET_isoc/e(JptiofTspant menu (see "_ulsocJe CTptlons

panel menu" of7page 5b_7

" Oroup--Disphys recorded shews with)m Iisting every recorded episode (see example h Screen A, at right).

Note:

In (_togJpview, hiJ_liqht a show and pfeg_s_NT_-R

D VieW a StJOTOlaly

ofFJ/f_cotFJed

577ows

/2less

EN7-2R

_gaklI'oco//;/pse

list

Screen A

Screen B

Sort By:

Press @ and _ to choose between the following:

* Title--Disphys recorded shews h alphabeEicalorder (see example h Screen A, at right).

* Dae--Disphys recorded shows by date and time, with most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).

3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

then

press ENTER again te dose

the

pant monet and disphy

the

recordings with

the

sdected options.

The

unautborized mcordhg, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is pmbibited under the eopyrigbt Laws of tbe United States and ether countries, and may subject you to dvil and criminal liability,

Copyrigllt @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rigllts reserved,

59

÷

A

÷ [

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

SCH EDU LE screen

The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or ddete Record and Remind events you set previou@,

* With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press

INFO te disphy a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screem

Record features

You can set a show to Record in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and

SCHEDULE, or change Record settings fbr a show in

SCHEDULE. There are three ways to set a show to Record.

1) Set

a

show to Record using the REC key on the remote control

Press the REC key on the remote control to record the show Once with current def_udt settings (start and end recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change the Record frequency (but not the defhuh settings) among

Once (&tim1[), Regular1> Week1> and Cancel

Note; Thefelg_tedRecordicon appeo/won the show t#e

erichtime you pressRE(;'See "Recordicon&"of? page 61

2)

Set a show to Record from a panel menu

1. I Iighlight a show and press MENU to disphy the

Episode Options pand menu.

2.

Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER [o display the Record Options panel menu.

* Highlight an event and press MENU to disphy the Schedule

Options pand menu, with the fbllowing options:

- GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no infbrmadon, and returns to the Service Bar.

- WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen system

6O and tunes to the highlighted show.

- DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from the schedule. A Confirm pand menu disphys. Press YES to delete the recording or NO to close the pane[ menu.

- EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can change existing recording infbrmatkm.

- SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a reminder fbr the show (Record is not cancdIed).

- CANCEL: Closes the pand menu, changes no infbrmadon, and returns to the highlighted show.

An icon identifies the event type. For mere details, see "Record

[batures,"a[ right, and "Remind [batures" on page 62.

3. Highligh[ the FREQUENCY fidd, and press @ or _ to choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Offi

4. Highlight the START field, and press @or _ to cheese in the range from 12(t minutes early

to

12(t minutes late or On Time (defimh = On Time).

5. Repent step 4 for the END fidd.

6. Highlight the RECORDER fidd and press _1 or _ to choose the recording device.

Note: Fo:connected reco:diflg devices onlj_

7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press _ or _ to choose how long you want to keep the Record event.

Note:

Fo_ connected/EEF recomfng devices onlj_

8. Press ENTER

to

highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, and press ENTER again te close the menu.

A Record icon fbr the selected frequency appears on the show tile. See '_Record Icons" on page 61.

Note: f--o_ fec'o_ding devices onl)_

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to dose the menu, change ne information, and return

to

the highlighted show.

Note: X_u

can change thede_lultv;#ues

Optiotls pnnd menu

fields.See

"Change deh_ult options"

onpage8&

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

÷

A

÷ L

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

Record features (continued)

3)

Manually set a show to Record

1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press

MENLO"to display the Schedule Opdons pand menu.

Press AV'_ _ to move through the options.

Press the Number keys or AV'_ _ to change the infbrmadon, as necessar>

2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press

ENTER to display the Record Opdons pand menu.

3. Enter d_e infbrmation in the panel menu fields. For details, see "Set a show to Record f'rom a pand menu" on the previous page.

Note:

Fd>en setttn_j a MarlugJ

_coordiR_L _/?e opt/oR

"Osi/j/"

/s avoiff_bleinstead of "Requl_ffJ_"See "Record icon& "below

t_ql?t, for8 desclfplTot_

of Recoe/Mons

4. When finished entering the in[brmation in the fidds, press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Record icon fbr the selected f)'equenW appears on the show tile. See "Record Icons," below right.

Note:/V/anuo/recording

is//kted f_)lchannel humidor

Or

highhght

CANCEL arid press ENTER to cIose the menu, change no information, and return to the highlighted show.

Recording notification banner

* If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.

If the TV is on and you are watching the charred that is set to record, the recording occurs as scheduled.

If the TV is on and you are watching a charred od_er d_an the one that is set to record, a r_otificadon harmer (illustrated below) appears on-screen befbre recording starts. At that time you can choose to start or cancel recording.

The defimk highlighted item in the r_otificadon banner is

"Change charmeI; start recording." If'no change is made within 3 minuees, the notification harmer will dose aueomadcalI> d_e charred will change to the one set to record, and fl_e recordirlg will occur as scheduled. If you want to cancd the recording, select "Don't change; cancd recording" in the notificatior_ banner and press ENTER.

Record conflict

A conflict message appears fbr the fbllowing reasons:

A show seeto Record overIaps with any part of another show previously see to Record.

A show set to Record overIaps with a show previousIy see to auto-tune. (For auto-rune deeails, see "Remind t:camres" on page 62.)

Select one of these options:

Record Arw_vay--This show will override an existing show set to Record or auto-tune.

, Doo't Record This Show--Cancds the Recording.

Record

icons

Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear on the tile fbr a show see to Record.

Record Once {_--Records the show one time.

r

_

Record Regul _rI) _._

--Records the show every time the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.

* Record Weekb_, --Records the show e_ery dine the show airs on the same day of the week and on the same channd, and starts at the same time.

* Record Daily --Records the show every weekday

(Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.

Note:

>is icon c}ispl,vysfor manuel fecotrJirsgsofff_z

" Record Suspend _--Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

* Record Off

The mmuthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs,

videotapes,

DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

Copyright Laws of the UnRed States and other countries, and may sabiect you to civil and criminal

liabiJity.

Copyright _') 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved, show in the list but will not record this show until the f'requenQ_is changed.

61

÷

A

÷ [

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

Remind features

You can set a Ren_inder to perfbrrn the fbHowing ffmc[iorls:

Automatically turn on the TV (if off) a(,the schedubd reminder dine, arid rune (,heTV to the chanrie[ of (,he show fbr which you set the reminder.

Au(,oma(,icaHytune the TV, a(,the schedubd reminder time,

DispIay an or>screen no(,ification banrier (ren_indirig

you

tha(, the show is about (,o star(-),

f}em

which you can choose te tune (,heTV (,o(,he show's channel or cancel (,he reminder.

You can so(,a show reminder in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and

SCHEDULE, or change the settings fbr a show reminder in

SCHEDULE. There are two ways (,e set:a show reminder.

1)

Set a show Reminder from a panem menu

1. Highligh(, a show and press MENU (,o display (,he

Episode Options panel menu.

2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER (,o display (,he Remind Options pand menu.

icon l%r the sdec(,ed frequency appears on (,he show (,ib.

See "Remind Icons"

on

page 63.

Or higtdigh(, CANCEL and press ENTER (,odose (,he menu, change rio inf'ornmtion, and re(,urn to the highlighted show.

2)

Manually set a show Reminder

1. Highligh(, SCHEDULE in the Service Bat', and press

MENU (,odisplay the Schedub Options pand menu.

Press A_'@ _ (,omove through the options.

Press the Number keys or AY@ I_ (,ochange (,he irffbrma(,ion, as necessar>

2. Highligh(, NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press

ENTER to disph) (,heRemind Opdons pand nlentt,

62

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press @ or _ (,o chose among Once, Reguhr1> Weekly (or Dail> if se(,ringa Manual Reminder), or Offi

4. Highligh(, (,he POWER ON TV fidd, and press @ or

(,ochoose ekher Yes (to turn on the TV au[omadcaII> if o< a(,the schedubd Reminder (,ime) or No (deEmk).

5. HighIigh(, the AUTO TUNE TV fidd, and press "_ or

(,ocheese either Yes (to autemadcally (,une(,heTV to the channeI you are se(,ting (,heReminder fbr at the schedubd Reminder (,ime; (,heTV mus(,be on at (,he

(,ime) or No (del%uk).

Note: You can change

#_edefaultvaluesof theRemind

Opl'ions pane/menufieldsSee

"C71angecJetmdtopt/Prls"

on page65 forderails

6. Highhgh(, (,heWI-IEN fieId ((,oset a (,ime for dispIaying the reminder screen), and press _1 er _ to choose in the range fi'om 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On

Time (defimk = 1 minute earl),).

7. Press ENTER (,ohighligh(, SCHEDULE REMINDER, and press ENTER again to close (,he menu. A Remind

Copyright ('0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. For demiIs, see "So(,a show reminder f}'om a panel menu," at bf'<

Note:

Whe/7 fallowing the opt/of7 "Dai/y'/s

&stewed

"Regulodjz"

See"Re/rlbd

icon& "on

the page,fof a desc/ipl'iol;_ ofReminde/

4, When finished en(,ering the infbrmation in the fidds, press ENTER (,ohighligh(, SCHEDULE REMINDER, and press ENTER again (,odose the menu.

A Remind icon fbr the sale[led fi'equency appears

on

(,he show die. See '_Record Icons" on (,he fbllowing page.

Note: Mg_nual me/is_ed by

channelnumbe/:

Or highligh(, CANCEL and press ENTER (,odose (,he menu, change rio information, and re(,urn to the highlighted show.

÷

A

÷ L

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

Remind features (continued)

Reminder notification banner

Based on your option settings, a rlotification banner will appear or>screen, if'yottr TV is on at [}'_escheduled Remirlder time.

A[ that time 7)u can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder barmer, or highiigh[ the show and press ENTER to rune to t}',e show.

If"no choice is made within 3 minutes, the rlodficatior_ barmer doses atltoma[icaHy and comp_e[es t}',e}',igh_ighteditem (def_mk is HIDE REMINDERS).

Note:

If more tka. two _wninde_ af_ set &_ the s_me fffne,

8FTOWS8p[)e_lf OFt 177ef_ef,q/rlr.!el rlo_/f/(;L_tiof?

b_nnei: P/ossA_f

toh_l/@htthed?o_s

Remind

icons

Following is a descriptiorl of the Remind icons that will appear on the tile fbr a show set to Remind.

" Remind Once --Displays a show reminder one time.

Remirld Reg_tk_rly_ --DispIays a show reminder every time the show airs on the same charred and starts a[ the same time.

Remind Daily _ --DispLays a show Reminder ever) weekday (Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.

Note:

>is icon disploya fo_ manuel _er,nirlde_ onl_z

Remind Stt._

--Show is Suspended dtte to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

Remind Off the show in the list but will riot display a reminder un[i_ you change the f}'eqttency.

Remind confJict

A conflict messageappearsfbr the fbHowing reasons:

. A show set wkh an at_to-t_meReminder hasd_esamestart

time as an existing au[o<mle Reminder.

A show set with an al4o-tune Reminder ovdaps with a scheduled Recording.

Sdec[ one of"these options:

Au[o-Ttme Ar4_vay--This show will override an existir_g

ShOW set to atlto-tttne,

Proceed, No Au[o-Ttme--Se[ d_e show as a Reminder bttt do llOt atl[o-ttlne.

* Dodt Set This Remir_der--Cancds the Reminder.

÷

HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG) 63

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AJl rights reserved.

q_ 8/31/04,

2:82

PM

63 r

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

SETUP screen

After you cornpIete the inkiaI TV Guide On Screen setup (as described in Chapter 5), you can change the fi._Howingsettings:

" Change system settings

" Change channd dispL_5,

* Change det_aukopuons

Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and fbllow the on-screen instructions.

With SETUP highIighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to dispk9, a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screem

Change channel disNay

This option allows you to edit channd infbrmation that appears in LISTINGS, including the fi_llowing:

* Reorder the position the channds appear in LISTINGS.

* Change the "tune chamlel" number.

Note: The "tunechannd"/}

flTe

a station Fo/examp/<

two viewers/n the same z/_; code may

moe/ve fl_e same station on d/_emnt channel numbe[_, depending on whether they have Cabb serv/be of am t_/bg a

cable box

* Switch a channel to one of the following seuings:

-

On (channd is ahvays displayed in LISTINGS)

-

Off (charmel is never displa.ved in LISTINGS)

- Auto-Hide (channd is displayed in LISTINGS only when program infbrmation is availabb)

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL

DISPLAY and press ENTER.

Chaage system settiags

This option appears only after you have compbted the initial

TV Guide On Screen setup process (as described in Chapter 5).

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM

SETTINGS and press ENTER.

2.

Press ENTER again to display the Grid Options pand llleilu,

3. Highlight one of the opuons, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen instrucdons,

2,

Press ENTER again to display the

Confirming Your

Settings screen.

3. Highlight one of the options, press

ENTER, and fbllow the oil-screen instrucdons,

64

HM94(E)06_ "65(70-TVG) 64

Copyright ('0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOF/A7 ION. All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 2:33 PM

[

÷

A

÷ L

TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)

SETU P screen (continued)

Change defauR options

This option

allows

you to change defiuflt settings in the fbHowing categories:

, Genera_ Defluk Options

" Record Defluks

" Remind Defiuks

General default options

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

Record defauRs

1. From d_e SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to display the Record Defauks pand menu.

2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULT OPTIONS and press

MENU to display the General Defimlt Options pand

111entt,

Enter the required infilrmafion in the pand menu fields

(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long [o keep a

Record event, the quality of the recording). See "Record fbatures" oi1 page 60 fbr de[ails on entering values in these fidds.

When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose the merm and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL [o close the menu wkh no changes).

Remind defauRs

1. From d_e SETUP screen, highIigh[ CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to display the Remind Def_mks pand menu.

3. Enter the following iIdbrmafion in the pand menu fidds:

BOX SIZE: The inkial Infil Box size when you open the

TV Guide On Screen system. Choices are No, Small

(de_mk), Large, and Last Used.

BOX CYCLE: The Infb Box size rotation wher_ you press

[NFO oi1the remote central when d_e TV Guide On

Screen system is open. Choices are No Orfl> Small Oili>

Large Orfl> No & Small, No & Large, Small & Large, and All (def_mk).

" AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide On

Screen system when d_e TV is powered oi1. Choices are

01t

(defiu*k) and Of£

Noge:.gettheAUTi9GU/DEto

Off ff you do notwnntthe

TVGuideOnSoften system to opeslevesyt/1778 ttJrfl

on #_eTI/

3. Enter the required information in the pand menu fields

(power On TV, auto-tune, when [o display the Remind screen). See "RemirldDatures" oll page 63 tilt details oi1 entering vahles in d_ese fields.

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose d_e menu and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL no changes).

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose the menu and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL to dose the menu with no changes).

Copyright O 2804 1"OSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

to

close the menu with

65

HM94(E)O62-65(7c-TVG) 65 _ 8/31/04, 2:33 PM r

÷

A

÷ L

SeJectingthe video input source to view

To select the video

input source to view:

1. Press INPUT on the remote contrd or TV/VIDEO on d_e

TV ffon_ pand.

2. Press 0-7 to se[ec_the inpu_ source you want to view, depending on which input jacks 3xm used for connecting your devices (seeChapter 2).

The current signal source displays in d_e top right corner of the INPUT SELECTION screen.

off

6¢/_o 2q

_F O_[orSi;_ort_

HL/MI

/D_

Note:

While the IsTputSelection sc/een is open,

you

a/8o can _se the _,T

bu_ons

on the

buttons

on the

f_mote cofTtf()/

(OF the Ohannd_

front pan@ to d?ange the/TIpU[

While 171e

press the/NPUTbutton

of 7the f_/note con?m/ot the F1//V/DEO

button of?the TV front pand to d_afwe the if¢)u£

• 21selectan/EEE Z394 bputsouroe,

press the Theater?Jet

DEVICF buttof7 of? the ;_mote cont/d (see page 26 & 44)

•ffan IEEE 1384 device is the ctJlT_nt klput, it will aN;eat at the

bo_ofTi of the input Sebct/on ilL,t howeve/; it will be f_/nol/ed f/otFi

the listif?he bput soufc'e is dTae_'ed

• X_u can/abd the video bput soumes accofdieg to the spec'i_L" devk;es you have connected to the T1/ (see next pngej

Tile soume can be 'Ttidden" See page 67

tot debris

be abb

to

change if?putsdtJdng

f_Coldie 9'

ff you use a device other than the 71/_ ?emote centre/to start

f_cordied and then change bpu_s, the t_corded atJdio and video

may be affected

W/VIDEO

Remote control

TV front touchpad

CHANNEL _'A

Numbers

INPUT

A

POWER

÷

HM94(E)068

6

66

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA] ION. All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 2:36 PM [

A

÷ L

LabeJingthe videoinputsources

You can labd each video input source according co the B,_>eof device you connected list of'labds: to each source, from the tbHowing preset

- - (d<fk.ll &Dd)

Hide

(so

Dideuss...sed i.t.,._ i. lDeS.t.,._.$'ele_do.

Audio Receiver

VCR

Video Recorder

Laser Disk

Compact Disc

DVD

DTV

Sacdlite/DSS

Cable

Input labeling example:

If you connecE a VCR

to

VIDEO 1, a DVD player to

ColorScream HD-1, and a high definitkm sateIlite receiver to

HDMI, and then label the video input sources accordingly (as shown in step 4 at left), when you press INPUT or TV/V{DEO, the INPUT SELECTION screen would look like

the

screen below right:

Note:

If you set

up

devices in Theater?\let,Tr_the associated inputs _ee automatically lilbebd and cannot be fe/uDeled urlU/you remove

the devk'e from Tl?eaterHet (see page 44)

If you set

up a

cable box in WDEO L

it will automatically be labeled and c'r;,nnotbe re/obe/ed

Ur]ti/ yOU

r_ITTOV_

the device frenl the TV Guide On

• X_ucnllnot select IEEE 1394 devices thmlKqh the INPUTSELECTION

windobx howeve/; yau can select and contie/ IEEE 7394 Uevices

thiolLqh TheateetJet (see page 44)

To label the video input sources:

1. Press MENU and open

the

PREFERENCES

menu.

2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.

3. Press _' or & co highlight the video source you want to label

Input Selectionscreen with no inputs labeled

Input Selection screen with inputs 1,4, arid 6 labeled, and input 5 hidden,

To clear the input labels:

1. Press MENU and open

the

PREFERENCES menu,

2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.

3. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.

4, Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

a ,* gZN

_S

Note:

L_;belsfor devk:es you set up kl 771eaterNetwill not be

cleared unti/ you remove the device Dora TheaterNet (_ee

page 44) The screen above f/}'ht i//ust/ates an example of the

input Labeling sc/ een a_er it was reset that still shows the

VCR label _r VIDEO 7 because d_e VCR v>_sset up in

Theater#'eL

>

Press _llor 1_ to select the desired label for that input source.

If a particular input is nor used, you can select '<HIDDEN" as the label, which will cause chat input co be '<grayedout" in the input Iisc arid skipped over when you press the

INPUT button on the remote control.

Note: ff you select "HIDDEN" for all of the input/abe&

U)e

POP feature wi2be c/isab/ecLif you theft attempt to access the

POP featur_ rite message "Not avnl7Jble" w12appear on street7

5. To save the labels, highlight SAVE and press ENTER,

67

HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)

67

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 2:37 PM

÷

Tuningchannels

Tuning to the next programmed channel

To tune to the next programmed

channel:

Press CHANNEL A or V on the remote control or TV

Dent panel,

Note:

Th/sfem_ui_willnetwer1<unles_yeupregran_channelsintotheTV_

channelmemoly

(see

page

4

0

Ifyouusethe

T1/_

r_motecantle/tostrut

recording

yau willnot

be ablete

d?ange

thedTanne/

recording1

r_cordinu andthee d?ange

thedTarlneL via'cowillbe thatall'lie

CUrTent/y tuneddTanne/

atJdieand

[

U

Channel label

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return

The Channel Return tbamre allows you to switch beEween two channe[s withouE entering an acma[ chatme[ number each rime.

1. Select the first channel you want to view.

2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons

(and the dash (-) burton if selecting a digital channel).

3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous channel will display.

Each rime you press CH RTN, the TV will switch back and fbrth between the last two channels that were selected.

Note:

If you press CH R_V fie/n a non antenna input, the 7V will t ettJm to the/as>v/ewedANTk_put and channe_

Using SpeedSurf to change to a specific programmed channel

Note: 7hisMaturewill not warJ(unlessyeu pregrT_mcharnels

into the TV_charted menTo/y(seepage 40

1. Press and hold CHANNEL A or T fbr a tbw seconds. The

TV will enter SpeedSurf mode.

Switching between two channels using

Upperchannels t

Current channel (highlighted)

Lower channels

2,

RepeatedIy press or hold CHANNEL ,A or V whiIe the

SpeedSurfmode is on-screen to scroll through the channel list. Release d_e button to display d_e highlighted channel.

The St_trfkock TM tbature temporarily "memorizes" one channel in the CH RTN button, so )ou can return to that channel quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN,

To memorize a channeI in d_e CH RTN button:

1. SeIect the channel you want to program into the CH RTN bUEEOn,

2,

Press and hold CH RTN fbr about 2 seconds until the message "Channel Memorized" appears on the screen. The channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.

3. Continue to change channels until your desired channel is selected.

4. Press CH RTN, The memorized channel will be selected,

The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.

Once you press (-;H RTN and then change channels again, the

CH RTN button memory will be cleared and the button will fimction as Channel Return, by switching back and fbrth between the last two channels that were seIected.

Tuning to a specific channel

(programmed or unprogrammed)

Tuning analog channels:

Press the Channel Number burn)ns ((t-9) on the remote control For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.

Tuning digital channels:

Press the Chanr_eI Number buttons (0-9) on the remote centre1, tblIowed by the - (dash) buEron and then the su/>channel number.

For example, to select digital channel 125-!, press 1, 2, 5,-, 1.

NOte:

ira CI/_/tHI channel is

not programmed

either tlffolLqh the automatic d?annd scan (page 4 0 or tire d?aend

add/debte function f_page42) you win ?}avete Lqne the RF

dlannd usyY@'

r_mote cantloL

"__

CHRTN

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPOBA] ION. All rights reserved,

_ CHANNELa,/T

HM94(E)068

8

68 _ 8/31/04, 2:37 PM [

÷

Selecting the picture size

You can view many program fi)rrnats in a varie[y of'picture sizes--Natural,

TheaterWidd* 1, TheaterWidd _ 2, TheaterWidd _ 3, and FttH--as described bdow and on the rlext page.

The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary depending <)*1 the ibm)at of the program you are viewing. Sdect the pic[<iresize that displays the current program the way that looks best to you, &e "Notice r_'possib[e

adverse @ets on TVpieture

tube," below right.

To select the picture size;

2, WhiIe the Picture Size menu is or>screen, press the corresponding number button ((t-4) to sdec[ the desired picture size.

Note;

• Yourv/socr;,nr_pe_l_d/ypr_ssP/CS/Zf:_se/ect#_edes/r_dpk;'tures/2e

(or pr ess the AY buttons on the remote cent/or while the Picture Size so'teen is opel_J

• "f-gd"may not be avablb/e tot some progt>m torfnaL_ (:wf//be '_/ayed out" in i'he Picture S/2eso'teen]

Natutam

picture

size

. The image is displayed dose to its originally fbrmatted proportion. Some program formats will display with side bars and/or bars at the top and bottom.

Natural picture sizeexample:The way the image displays will vary depending onthe format of the program you are currently watching.

See'Notice of possible adverseeffects on TV picture tube" at right.

Conventionalpicture on a conventional TV screen

Conventionalpicture in Naturalsizeon your wide-screen TV

EA mT

ChannelNumbers

-PICSiZE

÷

HM94(E)O66-75(8a-UseTV)

69

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8131/04, 2:37 PM

69

F

A

÷ L

Selecting the picture size (co.ti..ed) lheaterWide _

1

picture size (For 4:3 format program)

* The center of'tbe picture remains cIose to its origbml proportiom bttt the lef'r and rigbt edges are stretched wider to fiiI the screen,

21select the picture s/2e, press P/C SIZE on the r_mote control

X_ua/so can select the p/ettJr_ s/2e using the

menu sy:_tem Sehct PICTURE SIZE in the

VIDEO / TNEATER SETF/NGS mentz

TheaterWide

2

picture size (for letter box programs)

The picture is aretcbed wider to fiII the wi&h of the screen, but only s_igbdy stre;ched taller.

* The top and bottom edges of the picture are biddem To view the bidden areas, see

"Scrolling the Tbea[er Wide picture" on page 71,

TheaterWide 1 picture sizeexample

TheaterWide 2 picture sizeexample

TheaterWide

3

picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles)

The picture is s[re_ched wider to fill the wi&b of the screen, but only sbgh@ stre[cbed taller,

The top and bo_[om edges are hiddem To view the bidden areas (such as subritles or captions), see "Scrolling the TheaterWide picture" on page 71,

Theater Wide 3 picture size example

FuR picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs oNy)

" Kreceivirlg a 4:3

f'orma_

program, it is stretched wider m fii[ the wi&h of"the screen, bu[ rlo[ stretched taiier,

None of the picture is hiddem

©O

O

Full picture size example

Copyright (0 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserve_d,

Note:

/fyouse/ectooeofthe

TheaterWhlep/cture

s/2es, the _bp and bottom edges of the

be hhldell

_ view the hidden edges, either

scroll the picture CYheaterWhle2 aod 3 on/y)

or

try pfOglFff??

b rid//Of N_UtJ/_II pietur_

size

When sehclir W the p/r:l_Jm s/2e, the way the image displays will vary depend/r W on the format of he pmgrs, m you am

(-tuTerTI/ywat(;,hhW See

"Notice

of po&sib[e adverse effects on TV

picture tube"

be!ow.

Using these functions to change the picture size (i,e,, changing the height/ width rati@ for aw purpose other than your private viewing may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United

States andother countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability,

HM94(E)068

O

70 _ 8/31/04, 2:37 PM [

÷

8crNling the TheaterWide picture

(TheaterWide 2 and 3 oNy)

You can set separate scroll settings for TheaterWide 2 and

TheaterWide 3 modes.

To set the scroll settings:

1. Press MENU and open d_e VIDEO metal.

2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.

Usingthe auto aspect ratio feature

When the AUTO ASPECT fbature is set

to

ON and one oldie fbllowing input sources is received, the picture size is automatically sdected (as described in the table below):

A 480i signal from d_e VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.

A 480i or 480p signal from the HDMI input.

3. In the PICTURE SIZE fidd, sdect either TheaterWide 2 or TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).

4. Press Y to highlight the PICTURE SCROLL rid&

5. Press 4 or _ to scrolI the picture tip and down as needed, fi'om -10 to +20.

;'i_

a* {>

4:3 normal

4:3 letter box

16:9 full

Not defined

(no ID-1 data or )

HDMI aspect data]

Natural (with side bars]

TheaterWide 2

Full

User-selected picture size

[see pages 64-65]

Note:

TheAU7-OAgPFCTfe_tumisr_otapp/ic;_bletoantennaor(?;_hleinput

SOtJfC_S

, 2_eAUTDASPECTfeatum is notawti/able when the POP

double window/s open, the FREEZE mode is active, of the TV Guide

Of? ._cl_e/l

system iS

ape/7

% turn on the AUTO ASPECT feature:

1, Press MENU and open the VIDEO metro,

2, Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.

6. To save your scrolI settings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To save your scrolI settings permanendy, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

÷

3. In the AUTO ASPECT RATIO rid& select ON.

4_ To save your settings temporaril> highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To save your seuings permaner_dy, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)

To turn off the AUTO ASPECT feattu:e:

Sdect OFF in step 3 above.

Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 2:37 PM

71

A

÷ [

Selectingthe cinema mode

(48( i signalsoNy)

When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed) f}'oma DVD phyer connec(,ed (,othe ColorStream HD1/I-ID2

(componen(, video) or HDMI inputs <1,1the TV, smoo(,her mo(,ion can be ob(,ained by se(,(,ingthe CINEMA MODE to

FILM.

% set the CINEMA MODE to FILM=

1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.

2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.

Selecting the lamp mode

You can select either the HI BRIGHT or LOW POWER hmp li]ode,

The HI BRIGHT mode is usdhl when addMonal picture brigh(,ness is desired

(such as ii1 a brigh(, room).

The LOW POWER mode re&tces wear on the projection lamp. Using d_is mode should resuh in h)nger hmp lifb.

See "Lamp uni(, rephcement" on page 98-!00.

To select the lamp mode:

1. Press MENU and open d_e VIDEO memt.

2. I Iighligh(,THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.

3. In the CINEMA Iv{ODE field, select FILM.

3. hi d_e LAMP Iv{ODE field, select HI BRIGHT or LOW

POWER, whichever you prefbr.

4. To save ylur se(,rings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To save your se(,rings permanen(,ly, highligh(, SAVE and press ENTER.

To set the CINEMA MODE to VIDEO:

Sdect VIDEO in step 3 abo_e.

4. To save ylur se(,rings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To save your ser(,ingspermanentl> highligh(, SAVE and press ENTER.

÷

HM94(E)068

2

72

Copyright (-c)2084 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM [

Using the POPfeatures

Using the POP double=window feature

The POP (picture-ottt-picture) double-wirldow feature spIits the screen into two windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.

To display a program in the POP window:

1. Select the program yott want to watch in the main window.

2. Press SPLIT to open the POP window.

Main POP window

Note:

* Wher_theniainwirsdowisintheANT1

orAIVT2

mode, the ANT7 arid AN72 ieptA5 cannot be

selected tot fl}e POP windo_

o When thema/n wiiidowisin Video 1/2/3,

(-.'o©rStl>am HD 7/NDZ or HDM/ mode, those illput,._cannot be selected fer the POP window

* _)U caflnot View IEEE 1394 sotJlc'e programs b

the POP window

o Youcannot view two video or two antenna soumes

b both the main and POP windows s//71L_lt_neotas/3_

(You can view a video soume b one window and an alrterlna soume b the ethel:)

Green border

(denotes active window)

3. Press _ to highlight d_e POP window (will have a green border).

4, Press INPUT to open the Pop hlpttt Sdecdon window. Select d_e input sottrce fbr the POP window by pressing d_e corresponding Number button (0-7).

The current source displays in purple in the Pop Input Sdecdon window.

Numbers

INPUT

÷

/ i _._i_'! ¸_¸¸'_ • • _ • _ • _

To close the POP window and tune to the currently highlighted window:

Press ENTER after highlighting the window yo, want to view as a r_orma[ pictttre_

To close the POP window:

Press SPLIT or EXIT.

Notes

about

recording:

* When the POP window is open and you st;lrt recordird, the POP window

win close and r>cuding

will sturt

" Ifyou use the TV_ r_/77otecontrol to sl??rtr_cord/ng, you will not be d_le

to operl the POP window ff you a_empt to do so, the message "Not

Avai/ub/e" win appear on_cmen

, /tl} recon?mended thatyou use the TI/'_ remote cent/el to start

r_cord/i.sg

ff yOtJuse a device other dian tile TV_ r_/note control to sl?lrt

r_cordiRg,

yOUInay be able to open the POP window du/fng the

recording process If this happen& die recorded auofo will r_f/eot tlie audio of the active window (inak7 or POP), whMI may horde the audio

_/()tJbtended _br_corcL

HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)

73

(Ca-) _ C¢-3 _j

©

'SPLIT

Copyright O 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 2:38 PM

73

[

A

÷ L

Using the POP features (co.ti..ed)

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP}

WhiIe d_e POP window is open, press 4 or _ to swkch the so,rid (main or POP) that is output fi'om d_e TV speakers (and f'rom d_e VARIABLE AUDIO OUT and

AUDIO OUT jacks),

The window with d_e active sound is oudined wkh a green border.

Example: Press _1 Example: Press 1_

-FREEZE

Freezing the main picture in the

P0P

double=window

1. While the POP dottble-window is not open, press FREEZE. The POP window will open, displaying the main picture as a sdlI picture.

2. Continue to press FREEZE repeatedly to refi'esh the still picture in d_e POP window, which acts as a slow "strobe" oldie program in the main window.

Note:

77}eFREEZE feature is not avail@/e

#hen the POP win@w £ already

open

If you

pf_ss FREFZE w/}ell the POP window is open

tile message "A/ot aw#/_@le"will appear:

÷

Still picture

To close the still POP window:

Press EXIT_

HM94(E)068

74

74

Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM [

Using the POP features (co.ti.uea)

POP double=window aspect ratio

The POP ctouble-wir_dow fbature displays each picture accordir_gto its input sigm_I aspect ratio, as illustrated brow.

480i 480i

Note:

The AUTO ASPECT RATIO feature (page 7 73

does/7ot opet_te in POP double w/?_dowmode

V

- ENTER

Using the favorite channel scan feature

You can use this f?ature to quickJy scan and ttme the cham_ds you programmed as f_worite cham_ds in a nir_e-picture mu_ti-wir_dow_

Note: 77/efavorite clear,fie/scarteatu_ will not wc)fRunlessyou programchanlle/uhire _he

f_lvr)rited?am_dmemory (see "Pmg/_mmingyour f_lvr)tfted?a/inels"on page 43]

To scan and tale your favorite channels;

1. Press FAV SCAN, The TV automatically enters multi-wirldow mode and begins a nine-picture scan of your f_worite charmds fbr the current ANT inptm

To view your f_worite charmds for the o[her arl_erma input, you wiII need to change antenna inputs ill'st (page d7), and then press FAd SCAN.

FAVSCAN

11 _ 13

ABLE1 8

2. Press A_'_ _ to sdect one of'the nine pictures, which becomes a moving picture

(the active window). (The main picture is a_waysmo_ ir_g,)

3. Press ENTER to disp_a?the charred you sdected in step 2 as the main picture,

!J

_, 6 11

Notes about recording:

WhentheFAVSCANmu/thwindewisopenandyc)u_?ytost_u;*t_corclins_.

themessrv[_e "NotAw)il_lhle"

will appem on sc/_en _)u will slot be able to sl?ut r ecordislg until you close tile FAV SC/IN multi wislclow

ffyou use the TI/_ f_lTiote control to st;lit [_corcJifzg.

windo_ ff you

attempt to

do

so, _<hemes\_age '?VetAv_J/ilb/e While Recordi/w"wi// appear on scl eef7

It/stecommendedt/iatyouusethe TV_/emotecontfeltost_lttmcording Ifyouuseadeviceothetthan

the 7]/'_ [_Hiote c'ofitld to start fw:or dlil?g,you [rlay be ai)le to open the f-7_VSCAN multl winclew clu/ing

the mcordirlg process ff this happen& the mr'order audio asld video win reflect the audio and video of the

active wirlcJow,which may not be

wliot

J/OU ilitel?dJediT)[_COl(Z

Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV) 75 _ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM

75

r

÷

A

÷ L

Adjustingthe picture

Selecting the picture mode

You can sdectyour desiredpicture setth_gsfrom fbur picture

modes, as described below.

Adjusting the picture quality

You can adjust the picture quality (comrast, brightness, color, tint, and sharpness) to your personal pre_brences.

To adiust the pictt_e quality:

1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.

2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.

3. Press _ or _ to sdect the picture quality you warn to adjust

(CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR, TINT, or

SHARPNESS), and then @ and _ to adjust the setdng, as described in the table bdow.

To select the picture mode:

Press PIC MODE on the remote control The fbllowing popup menu appears or>screen.

C'L_L. uLk_3 __,mj _

{_Navigate _Select _[_Back _ _£xit

Repeatedly press PIC MODE

" to cycle among the modes.

Pig

MODE-

To select the picture mode using the menu system:

1_ Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu_

2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.

contrast brightness color tint sharpness lower darker paler reddish softer higher lighter deeper greenish sharpe_

4. To temporarily save the new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To permanently save the new settings, highlight

SAVE and press ENTER.

3. Press _' to highlight she bfODE field, and then 4 _ to select the mode you prefer.

4. To temporarily save the mode you selected, highlight

DONE and press ENTER.

Of7/_/ (ANT

7b tl_eexampb above_ _u carsselectciifferent

settirtgsfor eachklput selection

The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the

PREFERENCE mode (see '<Sdectir_gthe picture mode," above left).

Note: Temporarily saved settings wiiI apply until the

.........................

Resetting the picture settings

To permanerltly save the mode you selected highlight

To reset the picture settings to their [actory values;

SAVE and press ENTER.

Note:

1. Highlight RESET in the Picture Settings menu and press

ENTER.

• Thepk;turemodeyouselected/s/orthecurren_/eput

2.

Highlight

SAVE and press ENTER.

selectk)n only (ANT 7 /n the example abovej You can select a di/lYererrtp/brute teode for each/77pt£ select/on

Note: _7/sresetsthe picturessettlhgsk)r the current/hput soureeonly

(ANT _/h thisexarep/e)

, ffyause/ectaneofthe_cteiysetp/bturemodes(SPORTS,

sett/hg (for exnmp/e, the color

_rrlper_ture), the p/brute mode automatically changes

÷

76

HM94(E)07(

-81(8b-UseTV)

76

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

÷

8131/04, 2:44 PM

[

A

÷ [

Adjusting the picture(co.ti..ed)

Using CabJeClear T°DNR (digitaJ noise reduction)

The CableCIear _ digitaI noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be useft11when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially a Cable chanr_el) or pIaying back a video cassette or disc damaged by repeated use.

HDIVII CDI/Ij, ATSC_IE_

7394, mrTddllg/t_#

fTsocJem

To turn on CableClear DNR:

1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.

2. HigNight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press

ENTER,

3. Press V to highlight the CABLECLEAR DNR field, and then press _ to seIect AUTO,

Selecting the color temperature

You can change [he quality of the piccttre by selecting tTom three preset coIor temperatures: cool, medium, and warm, as described bdow.

cool blueish

medium neutral warm reddish

To select the color temperature:

1_ Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu_

2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press

ENTER,

3. Press V to

highlight

the COLOR TEMPERATUR_ fidd> and then press _ to select the mode you prefbr (COOL,

MEDIUM, or WARM).

}_Navigate

(_{Select

_Back ®_Exit

4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER.

To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

NOTE:

• If the currelTt/nput/sAntel_na, l//cJeo 1, Video 2, o_ g/Ueo 3, the menu will clispk_ythe text "CableCle_S

, /fthe curi_fltir_putis _)e/()fStl_Rf77HD7 of ColofSt/_am HD2, the menu will displg_ythe text "DNR"

, /fthe cur/_t}t input is HDMI or/EEE 7394, the melTu win

d/sJny the text "DN R ' and win be '_qmyedout" ib kldieal_

I'hat the feature Uees ilot fufIct/ef7 b this klptJ£

To turn off CableClear

DNR:

Select OFF in step 3 above.

4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER,

To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER,

Resetting the advanced picture settings

To reset the advanced picture settings to their factory values:

1. Press MENU

and

open

the

VIDEO

menu.

2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press

ENTER.

3. HigNight RESET and press ENTER,

4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER,

÷

77

HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV) 77

Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8131/04, 2:44 PM

[

A

÷ L

Usiagthe closed eaptioa mode

The dosed caption mode has two options:

* Capdons_An or>screen display of the diaIogue, Ymrration, and sound efibc[s of'TV programs and videos that are closed captioned (usuaIly marked "CC" in program guides)_

* Tex_ An or>screen display ofirdbrmatiorl no[ related to the current program, such as weather or stock data (when provided by individual stations).

To view captions or text:

1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES rueful

2. HighIight CLOSED CAPTION MODE and then press to open the merm sidebar.

3. Press _' to highlight the desired dosed caption mode and then press ENTER.

Advanced closed captions

You can customke the dosed caption display characteristics by charlging the background color and the text size, e/pc, edge, and color.

Note:

This keatute /s avg_#glb/e

To customize the closed captions:

_=_:"

_ _7__

2. IIighligh_ CLOSED

(_APTION ADVANCED and press ENTER.

3, Press 'g or _ to highlight

0',o,,,,'o@.....

_: ....

_2_:_

the characteristic yott want to change, and then press _ _o select the fbrma[ fbr that characteristic.

To temporariIy save the new se_rir_gs,highlight CANCEL and press ENTER.

To pennar_er_tly save the new settings, highlight

SAVE and press ENTER.

To reset the closed caption characteristics:

1. Highlight RESET in step 4 above, and press ENTER.

2. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER. All characteristics are se_ to "AUTO."

* To view captions:

Highlight CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4. (CC1 display._

trar_slation of"the primary language in your area.)

Note:

If tile pmg/_ffrl o_ video you selected is not clcsed

O_lpi'/(JfTeC/, IlO Cr;'pt/OMS

/VI2 cJ/sp/ily 011 sot_ef7

. Toview

text:

EIighligh_T1, T2, T3, or T4.

Note: If text Is not av_,il_h/e isl your at_, a b/aek/ect_lrlw/e

may _ppenr o1_vour screen

ff #_/s happen& turn the Closed

(_'apl'/Of7

Of_-

* To turn off the Closed Caption feature:

Highligh_ OFE

Note: A clcsed c_',pt/o/_siqna/ In

W

not &kplg_y/n the follow/ng s/tu3t/ons

*

When a videotape has been dubbed

"

Wventhe s/igna/teoepl'ion/}

11011

Digita e osedeaptio s

You can use the DigitaI CC/Audio selector

eo

seIec[ digitaI dosed caption services (if"avaiIable), which wilI temporarily override closed captions fbr digital charmels onl> When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio sdeceor presents a de_ult list of'services. If the sdeceed service is not available, the next best service will be used instead.

Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS li)enu.

Highlight DIGITAL

CC/AUDIO

SELECTOR and press

ENTER.

3. Press _ or "_ to highlight the desired service, and then press ENTER.

÷

78

HM94(E)07{ -81(8b-UseTV) 78

Copyright (ct,2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All rights reserved

÷

9/1/04, I1:53 AM

F

A

÷ L

Adjustingthe audio

Muting the sound

Press MUTE

to

partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off

(MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, tile mute mode wiI[ change Jr1tile tbIIowing order.

[_ Normal _ 1/2 MUTE _ MUTE _

If the dosed caption mode is set to OFF when you sdecc

"MUTE" mode, die cIosed caption tbature is automatically activated. To mute the audio without automaticaIIy activating the cIosed capdon feature, use the VOL Y button to sec the rob*me to (L See "Using the closed caption mode" on page 78 fbr more intbrmafion on closed caption modes.

....Z.

- -5

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts

The muM<hatred TV sound (MTS) _bamre allows you to output high-fiddip! stereo sound from your TV's speakers.

MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) contairfing a second language, music, or other audio intbrmafion (when provided by individual stations).

The MTS feature is riot available when the TV is in VIDEO mode

When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word

TEREO or SAP appears on-screen when RECALL is pressed.

To listen to stereo sotmd:

1, Press MENU and open the AUDIO metal

2, Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER,

3, Press Y

to

highlight the MTS field, and then press _

to

sdect STEREO.

Digital audio selector

You can use the Digital CC/Audio steerer

;o

converfiently switch between audio tracks on a digital charred (fbr those cham_ds thac have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily overrides the audio tra& chosen by the language option under

Audio Setup.

1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS metal.

2. Highlight DIGITAL CC/AUDIO SELECTOR and press

ENTER.

3. Press _ or 4

to

highlight the desired service>and then press

ENTER,

4.

To

temporarily save die new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

Note;

• X_uc;_n/eave_<heTVinS7-_REOmodebec_useitautom;_tic_//y

outputs the type of sound beieg bmaUcilst (ste/_o o_monaur;_/)

ffthe sterne sound/:_ horsy, sdect MONO to r_duce the noise

To listen to all alternate language on an ATSC digitM station

(if"available):

High[ighc the LANGUAGE field it1 seep 3 above, and then press _ to sdect the [anguage you prefer.

To listen to a second audio program on an analog station

(if available):

Sdecc SAP in step 3 above.

Note:

A second slucliopmgI_m (SAP) c_ln be hea_Uonly on I<ho'_eTV

bnguage _Tsa second aud/o pmg/>Tm ff you have

SAP

Of7 yOU Wi/I

see the current p/ ogmm on rite scs_en but henr the other hllgtJqi9'e k_s_adof

the DfogleFI7 _ ROITT18/aud/o

/_yOU

have SAP of 7 afTd the st;/roll

you a_ wo?t.d?/lW is not

WiNbe outpuL Howeve/; oc:casiona//y tlTe/_ is no soui?d at aNb SAP mode ff th/s /l_ppen& set the MT_ Leatum to STEREO mode

79

HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV) 79

Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8131/04, 2:44 PM

÷

A

÷ L

Adjustingthe audio (co.ti..ed3

Adjusting the audio quality

You can adjust the audio qua_ky by adjusting the bass, treble, and balance.

To adjust the audio quality:

1. Press MENU and open d_e AUDIO men.,

2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.

Using the StableSound" feature

The StableSourld °ofbature limits the highest volume levd to prevent extreme changes ir_volume when the signal source changes (fbr example, to prevent d_e sudden increase in volume that <if'tenhappens when a TV program switches to a commerciat).

To turn on the StableSouud _'_featu:e:

1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.

2.

Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.

3. Press V to highlight STABLE SOUND, and then press _" to select ON,

¢_Select _D_Dar"Back

3, Press V to highIight d_e item )ou want to

TREBLE, or BALANCE).

adjust (BASS,

4_

Press @ or _ to adjust the Md.

@ makes d_e bass or treble weaker or increases the baLmce in the lef'rchamM (depending on the item selected).

* _ makes the bass or treble stronger or ir_creasesd_e balance in the right chamM (depending on the item sdected),

5. To temporariIy save the new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To reset the audio quality to the factory settings:

Highlight RESET in step 5 above, and press ENTER.

The bass and treble are rese_ to 50 arid d_e balance is reset to

O,

_gN_vig_te @Select _i]_Baek _!i_E×it

4. To temporarily sa_e the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanendy sa_e the new seEdngs, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To turu off the StableSouud feature:

Sdect OFF in step 3 above.

Resetting your audio adjustments

The RESET fimctkm returns yo.r audio adjustments to d_e fb[[owing f_ctory settings:

Bass

.............

center (50)

Treble .......... center (50)

Balance ........ center (0)

StableSound _. OFF

To reset your audio adjustmeuts:

1. Press MENU and open d_e AUDIO menu.

2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.

3. Press V _o highligtx RESET and press ENTER.

÷

8O

HM94(E)07(

-81(8b-UseTV)

80

4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings, highligh_ SAVE and press ENTER.

Copyright tO 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved,

÷

8131/04, 2:44 PM

A

÷ [

Adjustingthe audio (co.ti..e¢

Using the SRS WOW TMsurround sound

WOW is a special combination of SRS Labs audio technologies

(SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a thrilIing surround sound experience with deep, rich bass fl'om stereo sound sources. Your TV's audio will sound fi41er, richer, and wider.

To adiust the WOW settings:

1. Put theTV in STEREO mode (see "Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 79),

2. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.

3. HigNight ADVANCED AUDIO SETTINGS and press

ENTER.

)

4. Press Y or A to highlight the WOW fbature you want to adjust, and then press 4 or _ to adjust the hem_

3D -- To turn the surround sound effbct on or of'£

Note: If the broadcast/s rnonauf_l,tbe 3D eftectdoesnot wo_?

* Focus -- To turn the vocaI emphasis eff'ect on or off.

TruBass -- To select the desired bass expansion level

(HIGH, LOW, or OFF).

5. To temporarih_ save the new settings highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To reset the WOW settings:

Highlight RESET in the Advanced Audio Settings menu and press ENTER.

Turning off the built=in speakers

Use this fbature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect an audio system to your TV (see "Connecting a digital audio system" and "Connecting an amflog audio system" on page 20).

To turn offthe bui]t4n speakers:

1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.

2. Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.

_a

_J ..............................

_ _,, _j _,_, j

3. Press _' to highlight the SPEAKERS rid& and then press _ to sdect OFE

4. To temporarily save the new se_tings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To turn on the built-in speakers:

Select ON in step 3 abo_e.

i{

Selecting the optica a dio output

Use this _bature to select the opdcaI audio output t_._rmatwhen

you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digitaI audio system to the OPTICAL AUDIO OUT jack on the TV (see

'%onnecting a digital audio system" on page 20)_

To select the optical audio output format:

1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.

2. HigNight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.

3. Press _' to highlight the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT fidd, and then press _ to sdect either DOLBY DIGITAL or PCM, depending on your device.

÷

4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

SR.? WOWandthe (@) logo are tmdemad<sof SRSLabs,Inc

SRSWOW

techflo/ogy /s

k_corpo_tedtinder/IbetTsefrom SRSLabs,/no

Copyright @)2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved•

81

HM94(E)O76-81(8b-UseTV) 81

÷

8/31/04, 2:52 PM

[

A

÷ L

Usiagthe meamB,card JPEGpictureviewedNP3 audio player

You can use the memory view card slots on the "IV right side parM to compadbD JPEG flies or play compadbD MP3 flies stored on a memory card (see _Memory card speciflcadorls" bdow and at righG You can display JPEG flies in thumbnail mode or view them as a slide show.

Note:

Never remove the memory card or turo off the TV white using the memory

card. Doing so may result in loss of dareror

damage i_) the memo/y ca,al or TV SUCH DAMAGE

IS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX

/t is re,comrl_elTded tbatyou back up your fT?e/y]olycard o';it_l Toshiba iS IlOt /iub/e

tel

arty cl;llTla_le

caused by the use

of

8fl)/

fT?eiT?Ofy

&'?/d

with this TI£ 7bsbiba will not compensate R)r a@/lost o'tltt} or

mcoalieg(s)

caused by the i_se of such cards

• F_)rlbstltJCtlOrTSOl_USlbgyotJrdllglta/ca177efa,

manual hiyour camera f_feftotheol_z,

Tef_

"

mLerto the owner_ ma/lun/ for your memo/y card

. f-T,,ilumto take proper car_ ofa fT_emoly card magi fyP,,veetdliv.s'ayof

pictures or piggybackof MP3 files from the card or result b cJ_mage to tile f77elrlOlyraid or Tk' SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY

YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX

See <'Memolp card care and

handling" of 7paqe 8C

" 27e techsffca/c/7teda set out b this OWl?el_frlant£J ar_ frleallt as a

guide onlJx

Pe17771ssionlsr_qui/_dborders)dowlT/oadMP3fi/esandrm_sicfmm

the Interact

_)shba has no rT}'ht to grant such pemffssion Pemllssien

shoukJ al_saysbe sought from the cepyi_qht ownei:

[] Naximum disNayaNe J PEG image resolution: 6000x4000 pkds.

[] _ia×imum number of files per directory:

370.

All files overthe 370th in a single directorywill not display/play,

Filesin directoriesmore than 10 levelsdown from the top level diledory will riot display/play.

[] Maximum number of files per memory card: JPEG = 1,000;

MP3 = 2OO.

All JPEGfiles overthe 1,000thon a single memorycardwill riot display,

All MP3 files overthe 200th on a single memorycardwill not play.

[] J PEG Ncture viewer:

Thepielure viewer supportsJPEGformat imagesonly,

Thefiles on your memorycard must be in a file and directory formatcompatiblewith the TV or they will riot displayon the B!

imagesprocessedarid/or edited on a personalcomputer(PC) may riot displayproperly or at all. Some digitalcamerasmay store imagesin a formatthat is not compatiblewith the Td,

[] _P3 audio pJayer:

Theaudio playersupporls MP3 formatfifes only,

• Thefiles on your memorycad must be in a file and directory fermatcompatiblewith the 1_/or they will not play.

Filesprocessedand/or edited on a personalcomputer (PC) may not play properlyor at all. SomeMP3 files maybe in a formatthat is not compatiblewith the TV

MP3 files musthavethe fellowing format;

- MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3,

- Samplingfrequency-MPEGl: 32 kHz, 44,1kHz 48 kHz,

- Bitrate-MPEGl: 32-320 kbps.

-

Channels-Stereo Joint stereo Dualchannel,Single channel,

ID3\!er, 1 Vel.2,

Nemory card specifications m Supported memory card types:

- ,_-_s,,_,_tM_J,_(3,3V) memory card

-_,;_..

memory card (vet'. 1,0)

-

MMC

(MtlkiMediaCard")

- Memory SficF" (Pro)

- CompactFlash _ memory card (Type 1)

Note:

Tile pictufw viewer af?d auo'ie plgger support FATZ6 tofTnatted

Cr_als

orllj4

(Mei?7of}/cafrJs forrnafted as FAT._2or NTF({ for

example, me ilot suppol_ed) m Naximum memory card capacity: 256

MB,

m Naximum disNayaNe JPEG image size: 8 MB,

Note:

.JPU5 files/_ffger than 8 MB will not dlsAa_z

MP3 flies have, no size limit other than the maxFtlum capac£y

of the e_ertloly cnr_Z

_Sm_r'_ed;e iS a registered trademark of ]bshiba Corporation.

_ is a trademark of SD Card Association.

M MC arid MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to M MCA (MultiMediaCard Association).

Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

]bshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash _ and CF logo _ registered trademarks.

_

HM94(E}082 87{8c-UseTV} 82

Copyright

tO

2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA] ION. All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/O4, 3:24 PM

/ r

÷

Usiagthe meam card JPEGpicturevbwedNP3 audio Nayer coo.t ..ed

Using the JPEG

picture viewer

Note:

If you stored both ../PEGand IVIP.-_

rTleq_o/y card, the JPFG picture viewe; will sto;t automatica//V when you/nse£ _he memoo/ ca;d isl the TV 7{)st_wt the audio

playel; you f77tJstfiist press EXIT to close the picture viewer and then s_/l? ft_e audio playe/ while the menio;y Cnld is still

bse;ted

See "ib still? the MP:¢ auclio

D/;ijler

whel7 a ITie;T?Oly

c'aK//S all_ady bse;feo', "on p%le 84 You cahoot ose the pictore

glower

and aodfo

player at the same

time.

To v_ew digital photos on your TV:

1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the fi'ont of'your

TV.

Note:

memory card

Never insert more thao one memory

card at one time.

Be sore to insert

the card correedy

I;@e/skle _'lc'i/ig left e,nd

the end with the ;_otched comer (if applic;_t)leJ irlse/ted irlto the

memoo/ c'a;d slo_

When a Cernpnct Rod7 memo/y ca;d is bselled co;7_ctl_ the

_:eotor

btJttOR

pops

out

(see illustmtiorJ bebw)

TV right side par/el

VIDE0:3 IN k_s_r

G)

Memory card slots s_

MMO

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

2.

In a Dw seconds, the images auEornaticaRvdispLU on-screen, with one

asa

L_rgepicture and five in thumbnail f}.)rnlat,

3. Press 4 to rotate the L_rge picture 90 ° counterclockwise.

4. Press _ to roEate the k_rgepicture 9(t° clockwise.

5.

Press A or Y to select another picture as the L_rgepicture,

6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.

f

SmartMedia memory card orb

MMC

(MultiMediaCard)

CompactRash ejector huron

CompactFlash memory card

During the slide show:

To rotate the picture, press _ or 4, and then press ENTER.

* To sdect another image, press A or _', and then press

ENTER.

* To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer, press CH RTN.

To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen, press EXIT.

or

SD

(Secure Digital)

\ memory card

Memory Stick

__J

83

Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)

83

÷

8/31/04, 3:25 PM

[

÷

A

÷ [

Usiagthe memorycard JPEGpictureviewedMP3 audio playercoo.t ..ed3

To set the slide show interval:

Note:

The picture viewer ml_t be closed be/or_ you can set the

slide show klte/ _d

1. Press MENU and open die SETUP menu,

2. Highlight SLIDE S/lOW INTERVAL and press ENTER,

Sdecc die interval from die menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20 seconds).

To close the picture viewer:

Press EXIT to dose the picture viewer and return to the regtdar TV screem

To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still inserted:

1_ Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS menu.

2. Highlight PICTURE VIEWER and press ENTER,

Using the

MP3 audio player

Note:

" If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on tl?e same memo?y cam',

d;e JPEG pietu/_ viewe/ will start automa_b_J/y when you isrselt the memory eafd

isl

the TIll 7b start the audio plajlel; jlau must fi/st press

EX/T _bclose _7?epicture viewer and then st;it? the audio pk_ye/ wl?//e the memoir card is still/nsertecL See "72?steerthe MP3 audio pl,'_yer

when a memoiy card is al?_ady inset-ted,"at r_ql?t You cannot use

the pictore viewer and audio player at the same time°

" While the MP3 auogbplayer/;_ playing

_7?e

VOLUME and MUTE eont/ols can be used: however those on sc/_en d/spklySdo not

_ppear: A/so note that the MUr_ function has tlffee s_ps Cp_ge 782

* &mound, bass, t?_ble, andbahnceadjustmentsshouldbemade befor_ sl?ld/ng tire MP:_ audio p/g{ller:

*

Pernr/ssb/r/sr_qu//edborUe/17JdownbadMP3f//esandnrusfefrom

the Internet 7bshba has no n_'ht to grant

stud?

pemJssion

Pefm/}'_/ols

d/ou/d alw_ys be sot4/ht fepm the c'opy?_qhtowne?:

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is no_ already inserted:

1. Insert a memory card into die approprhte memory card sloc on the tr'onc of your TV (see page 83 for details).

Note:

Never insert more

tha_ one memory card at o#e time.

• Be sure to #tsert

the card correctly

k_bels/de t'_C/klgleft and the end with the r_otched comer UapphbableJ klserted into

the memo/j/card

slot

When a Compact Flush memoiy card is/bserted corTectlj/, the

elector button pops out (see page 8D2

2. If you ha_eonly MP3 flies on the memor5 card, d_eaudio

phyer will hunch within

a

few seconds after being inserted and begin playing the first MP3

file

on die memory card.

3. Follow die steps under "Viewing digital photos on your TV" on die pre_ious page.

To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:

1. Press EXIT to dose the picture viewer and return to die regtdar TV screen.

NOTE:

ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE

VIE_I/ER BEFORE REMOVING

THE

/

o _

MEMORY CARD.

and/or savedclaramay be damagecLTHiS TYPEOF DAMAGE

IS NOT COVEREDUNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX

2.

For a CornpactFlash memory card, press the ejector button and then pull die card straight ouc from die TV.

For all odier memory cards, pull die card straight out t}'om the T_.

3. Press ak_ @_ u) navigate to the rewind, pause, thst fbrward, skip backward, and skip tbrward buttons, or to select anodier MP3, and then press ENTER.

÷

HM94(E)082

4

84

Copyright (ct,2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION AN rights reserved

.

9/1/04, I1:59 AM [

S ÷ L

Using the memory card JPEGpicture

viewedMP3 audio player

(continued)

Using the Game Mode feature

Using the MP3 audio pmayer(co.t..ed3

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is already inserted:

1_ Press MENU and open the

APPLICATIONS menu.

2. Highlight AUDIO PLAYER and press ENTER.

Press AY 'q _

;o

navigate to the rewind, pause, fiist f'orward, skip backward, and skip tbrward buttons, and then press ENTER.

To close the MP3 audio player:

Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to tile regular

TV screen.

To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:

1_ Press EXIT to dose the audio player and remm to the regular TV screem

2. For a CompaccFlash memory card, press the ejector bu_Eon and dien pull the card araigh_ ouc from the TV.

For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out fl'om the TV.

NOTE:ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO

PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING

THE

,

_" _

MEMORY CARD.

/fpu [emove the memo/ycmd while fdayir_gMP3 file& the cnrd and/or savedcats,,may be damaged THiS TYPEOF DAMAGE

IS NOT COVEREDUNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX

You can use the Garne Mode tbature fi)r shorter flame delays when playing a video game requiring split-second timing be_veen the on-screen display and input fl'om the controller

(such as music creation and high-acuon games).

Note:

_ use the Game Mode feature, the current video hputmustbe

Tile Game Mode ca/lnot be turned ON when afy otis/video

klput is selected

, Whel?a 720p o_ 1080iin/:;utissdected,

the T1/mustbeh_ [\J_tufal

picture size mode (page 692 b om'e_ i_ use Game Mode

Whe/ia480ior480phput/sselected, theIVmustbekle/the/

Natural of Full pietu/e size mode (_;age 70) hi of o'er to use Game

Mode

• Game Mode car_notbe used whefl the T1/'/shi TIieaterVdde L

TheatefWide 2, ot TIieatefWide 3 pictu/ e size mode

if:he TV /s in

one of these modes,/twill automal<h;_:@y Ngtuld picture

s/2e ff Game Mode is set to ON

Closed cap_/Pns are not awdh_bb wl?ee Game/VhJde is ON

To turn on Game }{ode:

1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.

2. Highlight GAME MODE.

3. Press '_'or _ to sdec_ ON and press ENTER.

The TV will swkch to Game Mode when the on-screen display closes.

Note: ff pu adjust the volume or make aW other adjustments

that cat_sea i/-lel?Uo[ on scteefl co/?l?olpane/to d/splg_y,the

Game Mode win be temporarily suspended until the of7 screen

¢;Ioletl ¢_plion ,4_l/_lole_l

iVlemorycard care arid handling

Use index labels made exdusiveIy f))r your specific brand of memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which can cause a malf'unction when the card is inserted or ejected.

If the image does not appear correctly, cIean the metallic area of"the memory card using a sofT,dry, lint-flee, anti-static cloth, and then reinsert the card.

Prevent con_ac_ of"the metilic area

on

the mernory card with dua, dirt, or @her fbreign particIes. Do noc totich the metallic area of"tile memory card with your hands or odlerwise handIe it with anything other than a soft, dr> lint-flee, anti-aade do_h.

NOTE: _shba /s not

h_bhfo_

memo/y catd with this N! _sh/ba w/2ilot compemate/or arly losto%taor

To turn off Game Mode:

Sdec_ OFF in step 3 above or change the video input.

_u caslchaslge

hIput iR8ejlof the kJl/owhlg

>soys

*

pfessfRg/NPUTon the remote cofltie/(pgsge 67);

* d?ailg/ng tile diannd ushlg the Numbers or ON a,71K,OH RTN

or k-AV_/_ buttons;

o pres'_ing TheaterNetDEV/CEonthetemotecorffm/(page44);or o pres'_klg 7-1/GUIDE of 7the tWTIote control (page d_aptef 7)

Copyright O 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

85

HM94(E)O82-87(8c-UseTV) 85

÷

8/31/04, 3:25 PM

[

÷

gettin 9 the ON/OFFtimer

%u can use the ON/OFF timer to turn the TV on and off at a preset time on a recurring basis.

Note: Youm_stfirstsetthetime

(see page 492

To set

the

ON/OFF timer:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.

2. Highlight ON/OFF TIMER and press ENTER.

Setting the sleep timer

You can set the sIeep umer to turn offthe TV after a set length of time (maximum of 3 hours).

The sIeep umer turns off'the TV one dine onl> as opposed to the ON/OFF timer, which turns off the TV on a recurring basis.

To set the sleep timer:

Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until the TV turns offl Each time you press SLEEP, the ume wilI increase in 10-minut:e increments, to a maximum of

180 minutes.

To cancel the sleep timer:

Press SLEEP until k is set to 0.

--SLEEP

3. Press _" to highIight d_e DAY field, and d_en press _ to select the recurrence (weekends, weekdays, e_ery da> etc).

.

Press V to highlight d_e TIME fidd, and then use the

Number buttons to enter the ume you want the TV to tttrn on.

5_

When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press _ to select

AM or PM.

6.

Press V to highIight the TV ON DURATION fidd, and then press _ to select the length ofume until the TV turns oK

7,

Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

8,

"F_irnoff"the _ The TV will turn on amomadcally on the day(s) and at the time you set. The TV wiIl then tam of}" automadcally @er the length of ume you set in the TV

ON DURATION fidd.

Note:

Wl?ena powe/&ilu/e

occurs, the ON/(?FF time/setthlgs

m_ly

be c'/eg_ted

,

To cl/_p/bythe on time setting, press RE(.;ALL

To turn of_t_e ON/OFF timer:

Sdect NOT SET in step 3 above.

To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:

1. Press MENU and open the SETUP merlu.

2. Press Y to highlight SLEEP TIIv{ER and press ENTER.

_

_

3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length ofdme until the TV rums of_'automaticaIIy.

4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

Note: cleamcZ

Tocli,_p/by

sleep pless

RECALL

Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

HM94(E)082

6

86 _ 8/31/04, 3:25 PM [

÷

Displaying TV setting Understanding the auto power off

Press RECALL _o display the fb[lowing irdbrmation on-screen:

* Current inptt_ (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)

* If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is _he current ir_p_t_,whether it is

Cable TV ("(-;ABLE")or offair ("TV")

* Cham_e[ rmmber (if in ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)

Time (if se0

Timer seEfings (ifse0

* Remairdng dine on sleep timer (ifseQ

* Remaining time on game timer (if'set)

S_ereo or SAP audio staEtts

S__mp/eRECALL screen

V-Chip rating stactts

* Picture size

* Lamp mode

The TV will automatically turn itsdf off after approximately 15 mirmEes if'it is tuned to a vacant cha*md or a station that comp[e_es its broadcast fbr the da> This feature f:tmctions in

ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes on[y.

Understandingthe last mode memory feature

If the power is cut offwhile you are viewing the TV, the Last

Mode Memory feature automaticMly turns on the TV when the power is resupplied.

NOTE: _)lJ shou/d unplug the TV_ powet cord flit/s possible

that you H42be awny from the fl/ for an extended pe/#)d of t/kne

after the power is [_s?_)f_d

÷

HM94(E)O82-87(8c-UseTV)

87

Copyright _) 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 3:25 PM

87

[

A

÷ [

The LOCKS menu includes the RATING BLOCKING, CHANNELS BLOCK, INPUT LOCK, FRONT PANEL LOCK,

GAblE TIbfER, and NEW PIN CODE fbatures. You can use these fbatures af'_erentering the correct PIN code.

Enteringthe PiN code

1. Press b{ENU and highlight the LOCKS memt icon.

D

if youcannot rememberyour

PiN code

While the PIN code entering screen is disphyed, press RECALL fi.mr times within fi_e seconds. The PIN code will be reseEand you can enter a new PIN code.

@Navigate @Select _Back @;,a_Exit

2. Press Y, which disphys the PIN code entry screen.

The LOCK SYSTEM screen (bdow) appears ira PIN code has nor been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter a new fbur-digit code, enter the code a second time to confirm, and press ENTER.

ChangingyourPiN code

1. Press MENU and highligh_ the LOCKS menu icon.

2, Press Y to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your f'our-digit PIN code and press ENTER,

4. Press Y to highlight NEW PIN CODE and press ENTER,

5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new fbur-digit code,

Reupe the numbers to confirm the PIN code 3x_uentered.

6. Press ENTER, The new PIN code is now active.

The LOCKS ACTIVE screen (bdow) appears if"tI_ePIN code is already stored. Press the Channd Number buttons to enter your fbur-digk code and press ENTER.

_Navigate _Select _Back _!;_S×it

÷

If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message "Incorrec_ PIN code" appears. Highlight RETRY and press ENTER, Enter the code again and press ENTER,

When the correct PIN code is entered, the LOCKS menu opens.

88

HM94(E}08{ -91(9-Locks)

_Navigate

_JSeleet _Back _iExit

88

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04, 3:32 PM

[

A

÷ L

Blocking TV programsand moviesbyrating (V-Chip)

Some TV programs and movies ind_tde signals that classiC, the content of the program (videplce, sex, dialog, language). The

V-Chip fba[ure in this TV detects the sigpMs and blocks the programs according to the ratings you sdect. (See the tables at fight fbr rating descriptions.)

#l I'h/s T1Zwhich supports the tJS ¼Chip system only

To block and tmblock TV programs and movies:

1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS mepm icon.

2. Press Y. which disp[ays the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press V to highIight ENABLE RATING BLOCFQNG.

5. Press _ and then V [o select ON. and then press ENTER.

&_Navigate _Selecl _#$_Back J_[_r_Exit

6. Press T'

to

highlight EDIT RATING LIMITS and press

ENTER.

#

independent rating system for broadcasters

TV_MA

Mature Audience Only([his programis specificallydesigned to be viewed by adultsand therefore maybe unsuitablefor children under 17.)

L) Crude or indecent language S) ExplicitsexuaJadivity

V} Graphic violence

TV=14

ParentsStronglyCautioned([his programcontainssome materialthat many parentswould find unsuitablefor children under 14yearsof age.)

D} Intenselysuggestivedialog L) Strong,coarseBnguage

S) Intense sexualsituatior/s 'ffj Intenseviolence

TV_PG

ParentalGuidanceSuggested (Thisprogramcontair/s materialparents mayfind unsuitablefor younger children,)

D} Somesuggestivedialog L) Infrequentcoarse language

S) Somesexualsituations V) Moderate violence

TWG

GeneralAudience (Most parentswould find this program suitablefor all ages,)

TWYT,

Directedto OlderChildren (Thisprogramis designed

TWYTFV for children age7 andabove. Note: Programsin which fantasyviolencemay be more intenseor more combative than othel programsin this categoryaredesignated YTFV)

TV_Y

All Children0his program is designedto be appropriatefor all children.)

Independent rating system for movies

@Navigate @Select _i;_Back _;,;£_£xit

The EDIT RATING LIMITS screen (below) appears.

7. Press A'_4 _ and then press ENTER to sdect the Ievd of blocking you pretbr. A box with an "X" is a raring that will be Nocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition fbr the rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See votes _It*'igtJt.

X X-rated (Foradultsonly)

N0=17 Not intendedfor anyone 17and under

R Restrided (Under 17 requiresaccompanyingparentor adul0

PG_13 ParentsStronglyCautioned(Somematerialmaybe inappropriatefor children under 13)

PG

G

ParentalGuidanceSuggested (Somematerialmay not be suitablefor children}

GeneralAudience (Appropriatefor all ages)

8,

When done sdectip_gthe ratings you want to block, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

Note:

, IfyouplHceanXinlT_ebox/lextto"lVoneRHtedofhloRatirlcL"

promTims rated "l\Jofle' or "AIo Ratieg" will be blocked

Howeveg ff

the procuem has no mlYrd bto/rT_ation provided rlothbg will be

displayed irl the ba/lner and r_}lYngsb/oc/@_gwill/lot be b effecL

• F) cl/spl;_ythe/et/_ W of tile prog/s/rl you are watching, press RECALL

o11i'he r_hlote oorlt/o/ flit is Rot fated, the word "NONE" appears

STEREO

TV-PG L V

On Timer: Every Day 6:00am

Sleep Timer: 60 rain,

_

NONE

Every Day 6:00am

Sleep Timer: 80 rain.

HM94(E}088-91(9-Locks) 89

Full 8:09 pm

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 3:32 PM

8g r

÷

A

÷ [

Blocking channels

Unl0ekin

temporarily

Wkh the CHANNELS BLOCK fbature, you can block specific channds. You will not be able to tune locked cham_els unbss you clear the setting first.

To block channels:

1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.

2. Press Y, whkh disphys the PIN code entering screem

3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code (see page 88 fbr details).

4. Press Y to highlight CHANNELS BLOCK and then press

ENTER.

If you try to watd_ a TV program that exceeds the rating limits you set, the TV enters program lock mode.

You can ekher unlock the program temporaril) or select a non-locked program to watch.

5. Press AV4 _ to highlight the channel you want to block, then press ENTER, which puts an X in the box next to that channel

To temporarily tmlock the program:

1_ Press MUTE.

2. Enter your four-digk PIN code and press ENTER.

If the correct code is entered, the program Iock mode is released and the normal picture appears. AII locking is disabbd until the TV is turned

off',

when the TV is turned on again.

6. Repeat step 5 tbr other chaimds you want to block.

7. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.

To unlock individuM channels:

In step 5 above, press

AV4 _ to

highlight the chamlel you want to unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the X f'rom the box.

To block all channels at once:

Highfight BLOCK ALL in step 5 above.

To unlock all locked channels at once:

HigNight ALLOW ALL in step 5 above.

Lockingvideoinputs

You can use the INPUT LOCK feature tO lock the _ideo input sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, CobrStream HD-!,

Coh)rStream HD-2, DVUHDCP) and channels 3 and 4.

You wiII not be abb to _iew the inpuE sources or cham_ds unti_ you turn of}'the input lock.

To lock the video inputs:

1. Press btENU and higNight the LOCKS rnenu icon.

2. Press Y to disphy the PIN code entering screem

3. Enter your f'our-digk PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press V to highlight INPUT LOCK and press ENTER.

5. Press Y to sdect the bvd of video input locking you prefer, as described bdow:

--

_

_

_ _,

ColorStream HD !/HD2, and HDbfI.

Y

÷

9O

HM94(E)O8{ -91(9-Locks) 90

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

AN rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04, 3:32 PM

[

A

÷ L

You cai_ use the GameTimer to set a time limit fbr playii_g a video game (3(t-120 mim*tes). Whe*l the GameTimer is activated, the TV e*lters VIDEO LOCK mode aild locks out the iiIput source fi._rthe video game device.

To set the Gan_eTirner'M=

1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.

2. Press Y to display the PIN code enterirlg screen.

3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press V to highlight GAME TIMER and press ENTER.

5. Press V to selec[ the length of time until the VIDEO

LOCK is activated (3(},60, 9(} or 12(}minutes) and press

ENTER.

Using the front panel lock feature

You carl lock the front pant touchpad buttons to prevent your settirlgs from being changed accidentally (by children, fbr example). When the f'ront panel lock is ON, norle of the controls on the TV fi'ont touchpad will operate except POWER.

To lock the front panel=

1_ Press MENU and highligh[ the LOCKS merm icon.

2. Press Y to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your t'our-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press _' to highlight FRONT PANEL LOCK.

5. Press _¢ to highlight ON and press ENTER.

To cancel the Gan_eTirner'M:

Select OFF in step 2 above.

To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has activated it:

Set the VIDEO LOCK to OFF on page 9(}).

Note:

(see "Locking video inputs"

" A messagewillappea_on-ser_enwhen 10minutes, 3

minutes,and 1minute f_/TlaiROfltl_eGameTime/:

, ffthe T1/bsespowerwith i'ioletern_ffnkwonthe GameTimeL whenpowet /s restoredthe TVwill e/Tte/VIDEOLO('K

mode, as/fl'he GameT/}Tlethas expi/ed, atldyou will have to

When the front pant is Iocked and a button on the touchpad is pressed, the message "Not Avaibg)le" appears.

To tmlock the front panel=

Highlight OFF in step 2 above, or press and hold the

VOLUME @ button on the TV f?ont pant _br about 10 seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.

TV front touchpad

® @

POWER

VOLUME _l

÷

HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)

Copyright _) 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04, 3:38 PM

91

Beforecallinga seMce technician please check tile fellowing tablefor a possiblecauseof tile problemand somesolutions.

Probmem Solution

TV will not turn on

Picture )roblems o Make sure the power cord is plugged h/and then press POWER.

o The remote control batteries may be dead. Replacethe batteries or try the front par]el buttons o Pressthe RESETbutton on the TV front pane] (page 9) o If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp Llnitand lampunit door are installed properly (pages 98-100) o The ]ampunit may need to be replaced (pages 98-100)Also see "LED indications" on page 94.

o Check the anterlna/cable connections (Chapter 2}.

o PressINPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO or/the TV front panel arid select a valid video ir/put source (page 67), If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the 'FV,no picture will display when you select that palsicular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.

o Anter/na reception may be pool- Use a highly directional outdoor antenr/a (if applicable}.

° The station may have broadcast difficulties. Tryanother channel o Adjust the picture qualities (page 7(_).

o [fyou are using a VCR, make ,_urethe TV/VCRbutton on the remote control is set correctly (page 27) o [fyou have two VCRs connected to your TV,do not connect the same VCR to the TV's output and input connections at the ,_arnetime (page 18).

o Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the W back (or

VIDEO-3 on the ]_/front) at the same time (Chapter 2).

Noisy pk:'turs

Video/nput Selection pr_:,b/ems

o [fyou are watching a tuned analog char/nel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear DN R feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the P,! picture (page 77) o [fthe hlput Selection wir/dow does not appear wher/you press IN PUTon the remote control or

TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel, press IN PUT or TV/V[DEO a second time, which will change to the next video input source and display the InpLJtSelection window

(,_nnot view external signa/s

or channe/ 3 or 4

Black bo'< on screen

o If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDE() 1, VIDEO 2

VIDEO 3 or ColorStream; or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the INPUT LOCK is set to OFF (page 90) o Set the CLOSED CAPTION feature to OFF (page 78}

POOr CO/OF Of 120 CO/OF

POP prob/ems

Memory card problems

° The station may have broadcast difficulties.

Try another channel o Adjust the TINT and/or COLOR (page 76}.

o When the ColorStream sigr/al source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive video frorn the VIDEO OUT signal, a starldard video or S-video [N jack must be used instead of the

ColorStream connections.

The VIDEO OUT jack will not output the POP picture (pages 18 and 74)

Make sure you are using a supported or walidmemory card format (page 82}

Make sure you havesaved the picture files in the correct file format (page 82}.

The card may be inserted improperly. Ren/ovethe card and reinsert it (page 82)

The memory card may be empty.

The memory card may be damaged.

÷

92

HM94(E)09_

-97(10-Trbl)

92

Copyright #) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04,11:43 AM

F

Probmem

Sound problems

Remote control problems

Channel tuning probbms

Closed caption problems

Rating Blocking {V-Chip}1problems

Recording problems

Other problems

somution

Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2}1.

The station raayhave broadcast difficulties Tryanother channel

The sound may be muted. PressVOLU M E.

[fyou hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to STEREOmode {page 79}1

Make sure the SPEAKERSfur/orionin the AUD!O SETUPn/enu is set correctly (page 81}1

If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source make sure the M[S feature is set to SAP mode (page 79}/.

*

[fyOUhear audio tha[ seems "incorrect' for the program you are watching (such as mLisioor a foreign

language}},the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREOmode (page 79}1.

o When using an external audio amplifier,if you connect the amplifier to the VAR AUDIO OUT jacks, the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 20}1.

o Make sure the ten/ore control is set to the correct device mode (page 27}1.

o Ren/ove all o The remo[e control batteries may be dead. Replacethe batteries (page 27}1.

o Your TV remote cor/troJraay no{ operale cedain features on your externaldevice. Referlo the owner's manual for your other device to determine its avaiBble features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature oil another device, use the remote control that came with the device {page 27}1.

o [fthe TV slops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turf/off the 'r'v, press the RESETbutton or/the front panel (see page 9 for detaiB}1.If the TV still does not act as expected use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51 o Make sure the remote conlrol is set to the correct device raode (page 27}1.

o The channel may have beerserased from the channel rneraoryby the CHAN N EL ADD/DELETE feature

Add the channel to the channel memory (page 42}1.

o The channel may be blocked by the CHANNELS BLOCK feature. Unblock the channel {page 90}1.

o [fyou are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 40}. If you are still unable to tune digital channels, dear all channels fi-orn the channel list (page 42}1and reprogram channeb into the channel memol}/(page 41}1 if you are still unabb to tune digital channels use the

Restore Factoly Defaults procedure as described on page 51.

o [fthe program or video you selected is riot closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen

(page 78}.

o [ftext is riot avaiBbb a black rectangle may appear on-screer/[f this flappens, turf/off the closed caption feature (page 78}1 o A closed caption signal may not display correcdy in the following situations: a}1when a videotape has been dubbed; b}1whet/the signal reception is weak; or c}1whet/the signal reception is nonstandard

{page 78}1.

o [fyou forget your PiN code: While the PINcode entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within 5 seconds. The PIN code you stored will be reset (page 88}1.

o The \!-Chip feature is available for the U.S.\!-Chip system only {page 89}.

o If you use the TV's remote control to start recording, you wi]] not be able to change inputs {page 88}1 change channels {page 69}1,open the POPwindow (page 73}1or open the FAVSCAN muki-window

{page 75}1.If you attempt to do so, the message "Not AvailableWhile Recording" will appear on-screen.

o [t is recommended that you use the TV's remote control to start recordir/g. If you use a device other than the TV's remote control to stalt recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied during recording (POPmode FAVSCAN mode, changing inputs, changing channels}1the recorded audio arid/or video may not be what you intended to record. See pages 88, 89, 74, and 75 o [fyou connecteda SymbioAVHD recorder,in order to use its full functionality,you mustfirst set up the TV

GuideOn Screensystem{page 23 and Chapter5}1.

o if your TV's problem has not beersaddressed in this '[_oubleshootir/gsectior/or the recon/mer/ded solution biasno{ worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51.

÷

93

HM94(E}O92-97(10-Trbl)

93

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/O4,11:41 AM r

LEDindications

The green and red LED lights are on die TV f_ont touchpad, m d_e left of"die POWER button,

The green and red LED lights on the TV con[rol touchpad (on the k_wer right corner o[ the TV screen) indicate the TV's curren[ status, as fbllows:

* Green ON (solid) and Red OFF = TV power cord is phigged in but die TV is OFE This is called s_andby mode.

* Red ON (solid) and Green OFF = TV power cord is p_ugged in and the TV is ON.

* Green and Red ON (solid) = TV f'ront touchpad is being pressed.

* Green and/or Red blinking (see table bdow).

TV/V!DEO

EXIT

TV front touchpad

A -1

j Red LED

Green LED

LEE) Indication

1} Green blinks 3 times after power cord

is

plugged

in;

Red

is

O[:[:.

Condition

The TV is warming tap.

Solution

Wail aboul 30 seconds until the Green LED lighls continuously, and then press POWER to turn ON the TV

2} Green is ON (solid};

Red blinks continuously at 0.5-second intervals,

The lamp unit door is not seated Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review "How to properly, replace the lamp unit" on pages 99-100 to ensure that the lamp unit door is installed securely If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba

Authorized Service Center.

3} Green blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly.

The TV automatically will try to restart itsel[ eight times (see item #4}.

at 0.3-second intervals;

Red is ON (solid}.

4} Green and Red blink continuously at

1-second intervals.

5} Green and Red blink

3 times only.

6} Green is

O[:[:;

Red blinks conlinuously at 0.5-second intervals,

The lamp is not working properly Turn OFF the TV and then ON again. If the problem persists, replace aker the eighth automatic restart the lamp unit (see pages 98-100}. If the problem still persists,

(see item #3).

contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

An abnormal temperature increase has occurred.

Turn OFF the TV Check to make sure all slots and openings in the

TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusly Turn ON the TV again.

If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

The TV requires servicing.

Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord in again and turn ON the TV If the problem persists, conlact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

÷

94

HM94(E)09_ -97(10-Trbl) 94

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

8/31/04,11:37 AM [

A

÷ L

TVGuideOn Screen:":FAQs

The }blk_wingare _equen@ asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen system.The answers represent the most likely sohltions to the problem_

SETUP

1. Q: What ifI move and my ZIP code or postal code changes?

A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbght

(FLANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Folk_wthe on-screen prompts to enter new infbrmation (see Chapter 3 ff_rdetails). It can take tip to

24 hours to receive new data.

7. Q! I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial setup of the TV Guide On Screen system again?

A: No. The in_brmation )<m entered is stored in the TV Guide

(.)11 Screen sysgeln meluoQs

Note: Fbr ('ub/e box use_, tile TVmustbe OFFand llTe&_ble

f_c'e/ved?ailnd l/rle up/rTforma_brs

2. Q! What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice

versa?

A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbght

CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input iuf'ormation and tuscan channels [br the new input

(see Chapter 3

_br details).

8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable to the

G-LINK _' input on the 17_7?

A: See Chapter 2: (onnecting your TV iu this mauuaL

You also cast reigcr to the TV Guide On Screen prompts during V(;R or Cable box setup.

9. Q: When will I be able m view myTV program listings and use other TV Guide On Screen system features?

A: TheTV Guide On Screen Ustem will be ready igoruse wkhin 24 hours oiginitial setup.

3. Q! What ifI change cable boxes?

A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press _r to higbbght

(HANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Follow die on-screen prompts to enter new input inigormationand rcscan channds fbr die new input

(see Chapter 3 }br derails).

10. Q: What should I do JigI cannot complete initial setup?

A: Iigyou are unable to complete initial setup using the owner's man ual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshib£s

National Service Diqsion at 1-800-631-3811.

4. Q! I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable,

What do I do?

A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbgbt

(FLANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Folk_wthe on-screen prompts to enter new input iuf'orma_ion and tuscan channels [br the new input

(see (hap_er 3 _br derails).

11. Q: IigI make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to the previous step?

A: Complete the remaining setup seeps. When "Confirming

Your Settings" appears, sdect "No, repeat setup process."

Follow the on-screen prompts aud input the correct information.

5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I change my Setup inigormation?

A: Highlight SETUP in the Serqce Bar. Press V to higbbght

CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new in_brmation (see Chapter 3 igordetails). It can take tip to

24 hours to receive new data.

12. Q: What iigthe channel number is not visible on my cable box?

A: Your calde box may be def_mking to a dock or time display once the channel changes. Watch the box careig_dlywhen testing the cable box brand code to see Jigthe chaunel changes to 09.

6. Q! Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide

On Screen system to be ready igor use?

A: The inidal setup process consists oig_nding the s_acions in

)<_urarea that carry the TV Guide On Screen system data and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and listings data.

13. Q: Why won't myVCR turn on?

A: There are several possibilities: a) An incorrect or

"no

VCR" code was entered during the

TV Guide On Screen inidal setup. Press the GUIDE button on the remote control, and then press _ to highlight SETUR Press V to highlight '<Change system settings," and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct VCR inigormation.

b) Make sure the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable is connected coffee@ (see page 25).

c) The V(R record timer is on. Turn off the timer.

d)

The wired remote

VtTR

is incompatible.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

95

HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl) 95

÷

8/31/04,11:37 AM

[

÷

S ÷ L

TV GuideOn Screen FAQs(co.ti..ed)

CHANNEL

LINE-UPS & LiSTiNGS

14. Q: Why aren't all my channels initially displayed?

A: Ai}er initia_ setup, approximatdy 120 chmmds are automatically displa),cd. The user may use the "Change channd display" t'camre to turn ON or OFF addkional chamlds.

Note: Eventholuh

you

havethe opt/on of on&ring maw

mo[_ d?anne/s,the sJstemmay not have the memory capacity to hok/ det_li/edp/og/_un

(Jesc/fp?'/OfIS for all of them

15, Q: When 1[opened the _[%rGuide On Screen system, 1[was asked to choose from more than one channd lineup.

What should I do?

A: Sdect the lineup that most dosdy matches the one _'oryour area. If'af}er ),ou choose the lineup, you w:uKto make changes to k, hig}iight SETUP in the Service Bar.Press _r to sdect CHANGE CHANNEL DISPLAY,Fallow the on-screen insgr ucgions.

16. Q; Why do all my channels display "No Listing?"

A: The TV Guide On Screen system has not yet received ks data downh_ad. The phrase "No Listings' will be replaced wkh program in_'ormation during the next downh_ad cycle, which <11 occur within the next 24-hour period.

17. Q; Why do some of my channels display "No Listing?"

A: There are several possibilities: a) The channds in question were rece*K1yturned ()N (in

Change channd display) and TV Guide On Screen }*asyet to receive ks next data downh_ad.

b) After completing the inkial setup, the first data downh)ad of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.

c) The TV power cord svas [eff unphiggcd f'or an extended period of time and the TV Guide On Screen system was unalde to receive program _istings during the sched tded download c)'de.

d) Poor reception caused mine of the data to be missed.

e) The calde bo× was turned OFE The TV power cord mus_ be pMgged in and the cable box must be ON.

g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFE If the connection includes stereo caldes with calde box to VCR and stereo connection t}om VCR to tdeqsion, the V(R mus[ be ON.

18. Q: A show entry in the _%r Guide On Screen system reads

"No Listing°" What does that mean?

A: Show inR_rmation t'_r that entry was not av:iaNe during the last TV Guide

On

Screen syaem in_'ormation update

(downh_ad).

Show

inf'ormation is updated on a daily basis.

19, Q; I have seen the word "download" in reference to the

_W

Gnlde On Screen system.

What does that mean?

A: "Downh_ad" rdcrs to the times throughout the day when the TV Guide ()n Semen system is r_'ceiuh_gchannd and listings M'ormation f}om your Cable or over-the-air antenna transmission,

96

20, Q: After some show titles, ][have noticed from 1 to 4 stars

(****)° What does that mean?

A: These stars are a broadcas_-ind ustry ratings system used to inform you of a show's qualiDs The more stars, the better the rating.

21, Q; What do the colors for shows in 6e Listings and Search screens indicate?

A: Green = Sports; Dark Bhle : Children's; Purple : Movies;

]%al : Other Show.

22, Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of channels on the _[Nr Guide On Screen system?

A: See the "Change chmmel display" section in the TV Guide

On Screen owner's mammk

23, Q: Why are some of my channels listed on 6e wrong nnmber?

A: There are several possibilities: a) Incorrect channd lineup was sdec:ed. Access "Change system settings" and choose "Yes, but my channd _ineup is incorrect," and then resdec_ the corrcc_ lineup.

b) ( hannd line-up changes have not yet been processed. Use the "Change channd display" feature to make adjustments.

c) Initial setup was done incorrcc@ (that is, the wrong

ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.

24, Q: Why doesn't the program highlighted match up with the video window on my TV screen?

A: There are several possibilities: a) The stadon in quesdon made a _ate change to its schedtded program lisdng and the

TV

Guide

On

Screen system has not )'el been updated.

b) TheTV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or boosted ante*ma system or a satellite dish (not supported by the TV Guide On Screen system).

c) Initial setup was done incorrecd> (i.e., the wrong

ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.

d) Incorrect channd lineup was sdected. Access "Change system settings" and choose "Yes, but my chmmd lineup is incorrect," and then rcsdect the correct lineup0 e) The qdeo window may be h)cked. Press SPLIT to tudock.

25, Q!

(]an 1[move my law)rite stations m the top of the _W-

Gnlde On Screen display screen?

A: Yes. Use the 'Change chamld displa3/' f'camre to make adjustments.

Highlight the station call letters to be mewed, therl use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

HM94(E)09_

-g7(10-Trbl)

96

÷

8/31/04,11:37 AM r

÷

A

÷ L

OPERATIONS

26_ Q; How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide

On Screen system?

A: SEARCH lets you find shows by category (Alphabetical,

HDTV, Mm.'ies, Sports, Children, Educational, News,

_trieg¢, Series) or by Ke).avoN.

27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the

'PC Guide On Screen system° What_ wrong?

A: There arc several possibilities: a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide

On Screen inidal setup. Redo initial setup.

b) The G-LINK (IR ]dasher) cable may not be connected properly (see page 25).

c) The calde box has no remote capabfli V and is incompatible.

28. Q: How do I reslze or close the Info window?

A: Press the INFO button on the remote contro[ to resize the

Info window. Press the INFO button again to dose the

Infb window.

2% Q: Is there a way m go directly to the next day_ listings without scrolling through each time slot?

A: Yes. Highlight the station you want to look ahead, use the

Channd Number buttons on the remote control to enter

"24," and then press MENU.

In the resuking menu, press V two times to scroll down to select the HOURS

AHEAD option, and then press ENTER.

30. Q: Why can't I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue screen.

A: There are severn[ possibilities (without a calde box): a) The recording unit was not connected or set tip correcd> b) The incorrect channd lineup was sdec_ed. Press GUIDE and then _ to highlight SETUP. Press V to high[ight

"Change us_em settings," and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to selec_ the correc_ channd lineup.

OPERATIONS

{continued)

31. Q: Why won't my VCR change channels and why does it change to the wrong channel?

A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box): a) The VCR is no_ set on the correct output channel Set the

VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channd is set by your cable system.

b) The VCR and/or calde box are hooked up incorrecd)_

Refer to )<uir VCR owner's manua_ or contac_ )cult Calde

TV company for proper wiring procedures.

32. Q: Is Help available in the _V Gnlde On Screen system?

If so, how do I find it?

A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,

Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO key on the remote control An expanded Info Box displap additional hdp information.

Press INFO again to dose the box

Hdp is a_soavailablein a panel menu. Press INFO m display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to dose die box.

RECORD/RENRND

33. Q: (;an I tune m a different channel while recording a program?

A: No.

34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in the GUH)E?

A: There is no _imi_to the number of shows that can be programmed into the schedu_ememopi_

35. Q: Ira program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular basis, does it count as five?

A: No, whether a program is schedu[ed ONCE,

REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in the RECORD stack memor)c

36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the recorded shows I have already programmed?

A: The start times and channd numbers of shows that have been programmed will be retained in the memo U of the

TV Guide On Screen system. Titles will listings are restored.

3Z Q: (;an I set a Record or Remind event without highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen system?

A: Yes.TV Guide On Screen has a Manua_ Record and

Remind fcaturc_ Highlight

SCHEDULE

in the Service Bar, and press MENU.

Choose the m_ent type, press ENTER, and then enter the date, start and s_op time, channe_ numbe_; and so f[_rth.

38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?

A: Once--records/reminds the show one time.

Daily (manual only)--records the time, channel, input, recorder combination Monday through Frida)<

Regularl)_ records/reminds the show every time the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.

Weekl)_ records/reminds the show each time the show airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and starts at the same time.

Off (no_cancd)--keeps the show in the list but will no_ record/remind the show until the t}equency is changed.

Copyright@ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,

97

HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl) 97

÷

8/31/04,11:37 AM

[

÷

A

÷

4

Lampunit replacement and care

Repmacing the mampunit

(User-replaceable component)

_

WARNING:

RiSK OF

REMOVETV COVERS,EXCEPTAS SPECiFiED

HEREIN. REFERALL SERViCiNGNOTSPECiFiEDiN

THiS MANUAL TOQUALiFiEDSERVICEPERSONNEL,

Failureto foilow this WARNINGmay resuk in death or serious

injuly.

The ligh_ source tbr this TV is a mercury kunp with imernal ammspheric pressure that increases during use. Tile lamp has a limited service lifb that varies depending on product use and user settings,

As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service 1rib and will generally decrease over time. The average useful service lifb fbr the lamp is approximatdy

8,(t(t(t hours in LOW POWER mode or 6,(}(t(} hours in HI BRIGHT mode.

See "Sdec@lg the

Lamp mode" on page 72 tbr intbrmatkm on switching the lamp mode_ Because these are averages, some lamps will require eadier replacement,

Note : The/amp is warmn/ed on/y far #re perioc/sand to the

extent set forth in the Limited

[/VafTant# app/k;ab/eta /his set;

which is a subs/antia//yshofter pefiad of time than t/re average

usefu/ serwbeperiod See "Limited United Stal_s

[/_#fTanty"

OR

page m2 or "Limited Canar/aWan_nty"on page mA as applit-able

If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

3_m may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brighmess of the picture; and the st-rengdl of the quarre

grass

in the Iamp wilI be reduced and tile lamp may rupture (ofien making a loud noise when this happens).

If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate until tile lamp unit is replaced.

securelyinside the/arep urli_

CAUTmON: Always handle the lamp unit with care.

The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by consumers; however,if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional abuse (such asexcessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets}, the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.

When to reNace the mampuNt

You should replace the lamp unit:

" if'the picture darkens and/or cok)rs fi_de; if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3, page

94); or if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indicaion #3, page 94),

To obtain a replacement lamp unit:

In the U.S.:

In warranty www.tacp.toehibaocom/service

Out of warranty www.ceaccesseries.toehibaocom

Call toIFfree

1-800-631-3811.

Consult your consumer electronics dealer for availability,

In Canada:

Contacta [bsbiba paresdistributor by directing your web browser to www.toshiba°ea. Click"Home Entertainment,"and then dick

"Support,"

Use the replacement lamp unit model listed below only.

Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV and/or lamp.

type lamp unit: Nodem No, TB25-LMP

(Stock no,

23311083}

HM94(E)098

8

98

Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORA_[ON.

All rights reserved,

_ 8/31/04, 11 :59 AM [

L

÷

A

÷ L

Lampunit replacement and care

How to repJace the Jamp unit

z_ WAF{NING: RISK OF

TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF ELECTRICSHOCK, NEVER

REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPEC|FJED

HEREIN, REFER ALL SERViCiNG NOT SPECiFiED iN

THiS MANUAL TO QUALiFiED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Failure to follow this WARNING may resuk Jndeath or serious injul%

Required tools: Manua_ Philips screwdriver; g_o_as.

Opdona_ tad: 5/32" or 4ram AHen wrench.

1.

Thin off'the

TV and unphg d_e power cord,

....

WAR_I_: Eye damage may result from

, directly viewing the light pradaeed by this

\,, tamp, Always turn off the TV and LInpfflgthe power cord before opening the lamp unit door.

4. Using a manual Philips screwdriver,_oosenthe rsvoscrewson the hmp unit.

Lamp unit screws

WARNING:

RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK!

The lampunit door is providedwith an

]

interlockto reducethe risk of electricshock and excessive to service without removingthe lamp unit door completely. Failureto follow this WARNINGmay result in death or seriousinjury.

2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (I) hater bd_re replacing

it.

5.

Grasp the Iamp unit haildle and gendy pul the hmp mlit smflght our of the _ Set the

(lid

hmp unh aside (see

"Disposirg of the used hmp unit" oil page 100).

/

Touching the lamp before it has cooled will resuRin severe barns, ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR

AT

LEAST ONE

(1)

HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.

3.

Oil the Limp unit door oil the side of'd_e TV, bosen d_e d_unlb screw by hand or by using a 5/32" or 4ram Allen wrench, and then remove the hmp unit door.

TV back

Note: Wear gloves when replacing the tamp unR.

Lamp unit door detail

Thumb screw

99

HM94(E}098-105(11-App)

99

Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04,12:00 PM r

÷

A

÷ [

Lampunit replacement and care (co.t . ed}

HOw tO replace the lamp unit (continued:)

8,

Ream_ch the hmp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks

on the left side of the hmp unit door inside the opening in the TV cabinet.

6, Carefully insert the new hrnp unk straight into the IV untl it is

_uly

seated,

Lamp unit door

9, Rephce the thurnb screw and hand<ighten,

Note

:

* Neversubjeetthel_,npan/tto excess/_shonk

° Never i_>uchtire &np u/fit gloss or otherw£e get it dir{/

Doir W so rn;!y affect the image qua@ and rnduce the service/fie of the @np .lee "C/eauing the lamp unit gk_ss" beJow

__ H __

CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS if you accidentahytouch the lamp unit glassor otherwise get it dirty,wipe it with a lnt-free lenscleaningcloth (such as a cloth for cleaningcamera lensesor eyeglasses],

_UTJO_: of

I_EVER clean a hot lamp with

® cleaning agent.

Many ordinary cleaning agents

[such as glass cleaners) contain cl_em_catsthat may De flammable _t certain ten2eratures, it me la_ p unit is not atfowed to cool for at least one (1) hour. such cnemtcas may _gmte.

Lamp unit door

_OTE -"Make sure the lamp unit door is installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not turn on.

10.

Ph*gin the power cord and turn on the T_ After the initial warmup period (which rnay take severalsecunds fbr f:dl picture brighmess), the TV should operate r_orrnal> Ira W of the fblosving cunditions exist, turn off the TV, unphlg the power cord, and repea_s_eps 1-9 to ensure tha_ the hrnp unit and hrnp unit door are instaled correctly:

. No picture o Dark picune " TV wil not turn on

If', af'terrepeating s;eps 1-9, the problem stil exists:

In the U.S. call Cus_on_erService a_ 1-800-631-3811.

In Canada, locate the nearest Toshiba aud_orized service depot

by

directing 7)ur web browser _o www._oshiba.ca; dick "Home Entertainment," and then click ;_Support,"

7,

Using a rnanua[ Philips screwdrh'er, tighten the v,vo hrnp unk screws.

Note: Hand-tighten

only. Do not use an electric scrnwdrwer:

Lamp unit screws

(use manual Phillips screwdriver only)

NOT[ : Makesure the lampunit andscrews are installedsecurely;otherwise,the TV may not turn on andthe lamplife may beshortened.

Disposing of the used lamp

unit

" Phce the usedhmp unit in the ernpg, box from the new unit,

, Keep the hrnp unit unt of reachof chtdren and pets,

OA[JTJON: Always handle the lamp unit with care.

The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacenlent by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.

Dispose of the used hrnp unit by the approved method for

}x_ur area

NOTF : The lamp unitcontains mercury.Disposalof mercurymay be regulateddue to environmentalc0nsideral0ns. For disposal or

Alliance(vwvw.eiaeorg},

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

A/rights reserved,

HM94(E)098

100

100 _ 8/31/04, 12:00 PM [

÷

A

÷ [

NOTE:

, This model comp;ies

with

the specifications listed

below.

, Designs and specifications ale subject

, This model may

not he compatible

with to change

features without

a#d/or

notice.

specifications that may be added

#l the h_tureo

Television System

NTSC standard

ATSC standard (8VSB)

Digital Cable (64 ()._AM256 QAM; in-the-dear, unencrypted*)

Chamtel Coverage

VHF: 2 through 11

UHF: 14 through 69

Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-I, A through I)

Super band (J through W)

Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)

Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 125)

Power Source

120 V AC, 60 Hz

Power Consumption

250 W (average)

45 W in standby mode (power cord plugged in arrd power OFF)

Audio Power

15W+IhW

_EITc'l_gy_e(J

chsflTftU?

c'af?/)_

IlSlllJ a

Vlewe(J OR this

7V

&_bleCARDSeep_,qe72hotUetails

Speaker Type

Main: Two 4-inch

(10cm)

round

Tweeter: Two 1-5/8-inch (4cm) round

Video/Audlo TermlnaJs

S-VIDEO INPUT:

Y : I V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm

VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:

VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% moduhtion equivtlent,

22 k ohm or greater)

ColorStream _'(component video) HD INPUT:

Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohnr

PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 obnr

PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 obnr

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k olun or greater

Suggested resolutions: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

Video/Audlo Terminals (continued)

HDMI _"INPUT:

HDMI compliant (type A connector)

HDCP compliant

E-EDID** compliant

Suggested scan rates: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling fi:equency; 16/20/24 bits per sample

NOTE: _?ls

iV

UoesglotproviUeHFJM!OUTPU7_

VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also fbr recording):

VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 obn], negative sync.

AIJDIO: 150 mV(rnrs) (30% modulation equivJent,

2.2 k ohm or Jess)

VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:

0.300 mV(rnrs) (30% moduhtion equivalent,

2.2 k ohm or Jess)

G-LINK '' and IR OUTPUT:

3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mona socket (IR blaster cables supplied)

IEEE-1394 INPUT/OUTPUT;

IEEE- 1394 compliant

DIGITAl, AUDIO OUTPUT;

Optical type

Dimensions

46HM94:

52HM94:

62HM94:

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Hdgbt:

Depth:

53-1/8 inches (1664 ram)

31-13/16 inches (808 nrm)

15-1/4 inches (387 ram)

58-3/8 it]cbes (1483 ram)

35-1/16 inches (891 ram)

15-1/4 inches (387 ram)

67-1/16 inches (17{)3 nrm)

40-15/16 irrches (1040 nmr)

18-3/16 inches (462 ram)

Weight

46HM94:78 lbs (35.38 kg)

52HM94:83 lbs (37.65 kg)

62HM94:99 lbs (44.90 kg)

Supplled Accessories

* Two dual-wand IR blaster cables

* Remote corrtro[ with two size <<AA"alkaline batteries

OptlonaJ Stands:

46HM94:ST4694 or ST4684

52HM94:ST5294 or ST5284

62HM94:ST6294 or ST6284

** E EDID Enhanced Extended Display Identification

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AN rights reserved. 1{)1

HM94(E)O98-105(11-App) 101

÷

11/3/04,10:55 AM

[

÷

Limited United States Warranty

for DLP Television Models

]oshiba America Consumer Produets, LLC ("]XCP"} makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the Urfited States

THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL

CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP

TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL

CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR

TRANSFEREE.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED iN THE U.S.A. ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*

TACP waRants this DLP television and its pairs against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP'S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR

LABOR. TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will come to your home when warranly 8elvice is required Depending on the type of repair requiled, either the service will be performed in your home or the set will be taken to the TACP Autholized Selvice Station fol repail and leturned to your hoa/e at no COSt to yOU

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*

TACP waRant8 the lamp unit in this DLP television against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of ouginal retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, ,ATTACP'S

OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR

CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED

UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit i8 a user replaceable component

Rental Units

The warrar_ty fol rer_taltlnit8, inoklding the lamp units contair_edtherein.

begins with the date of first rental or thhly (30) days from the date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes fhet,

*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units rACP wan_antsDLP televisions, including the lamp units contained therein, sold and used for commereial purposes as follows: all paisa are warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) clays after the date of oFiginalpurchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT

TACP'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW

OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.

Owner's IVlanua_ and Pradnct Registration

Read this owner's manual thoFoughly before opelating this DLP television

Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your product online at wwwotaep°toshiba°com/serviee as soon as possible

By registering your product you will enable TACPto bring you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the Consumer Product

Safety Act, Failureto register your product does not diminish your warranty rights

Yenr Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1) "_oun/list provide your bill of sale or other proof of pLirohase

(2} All warranly servicing of this DLP television must be performed by an

Authorized TACP Service Station

(3} these warranties flora TACPare effBCtiveonly if the DLP television is pulshased and operated in the LISA. or Puello Rieo

(4) Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of oustolner controls, and instaflation or repair of antenr_a 8ystea/8 are not coveled by these warranties, Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility

(5} Warranties extend only to defects in matelials or workmar_ship as limited above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the D LP television OFparts eaused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or fiuctuatiorm in electlic power}, improper installation, improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP: use or inalfunction thlough simultaneous use of this ploduct and connected equipment; el to LInit8that have been modified or had the serial nunlber removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If. after following all of the operating instructions in this inanaal and cheekir_g the "]roubleshooting" 8eclion, you find that selviee is needed;

(1) ]o find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station. visit TACP's web site at wwwotaep.teshiba°eora/serviee

3811 oF call toll free I 800 631

(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the Authorized

Service Station

For additional

information,

visit TACP's web site:

www.taep.toshiba.eomo

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE

U.S.A., INCLUDING THE iMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES iMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATEOF THE U.S.A. AS

HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY iS EXCLUSIVE AND

iN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,

AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL

TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFIT{-;,BUSINESS

iNTERRUPTION. OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED

DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS

PRODUCT).

No person, agent, distributol, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modity, or extend the terms of these waRanties in any manner whatsoever

The time within which aetion must be commenced to enforce any obligation of FACP arising under this warranty o_ under any law of the United States or of any state theFeof is heFeby limited to 90 clays from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect This lia/itation does not apply to implied wauentie8 arising under the law of any state of the U,SA,

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU

MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATETO

STATEIN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,

LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN ACTION MAY BE

BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS

OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH

CIRCUMSTANCES.

0804

Copyright (0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved,

HM94(E)098

102

102 _ 8/31/04, 12:00 PM [

÷

Limited Canada Warranty for DLP Television IViodeis

]oshiba of Canada Limited ("TCL"] makes the following B/lited warranties to origh-_a[consumers in Canada

THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORiGiNAL

CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP

TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED iN CANADA ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (t}

Rentam Units

*Limited

Owner's rights

Warranty

Manual

Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*

TCL warrants this DLP television television and its parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, ,ATTCES

OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR

LABOR. TCL Authorized SepAce Depot personnel will come to your home when warranty selvice is required Depending or] the type of repair requiled, either the service will be pel%la/ed in your home ol the set will be taken to the TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100

KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.

Limited One (1} Year Warranty on Lamp Unit _ fCL wanants the ]amp unit in this DLP television against defects in matedab o_ workmanship for a period of one (1} year after the date of ouginal retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCLiS OPTION,

EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR

CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED

UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user replaceabb component.

The warlar_ty for rental units, inckldir_gthe ]amp units contah-_edtherein.

begins with the date of first rental or thhly (30} days flom the date of shipment to the rental fhm, wMchever eomes fhst for Comraerciam Units

FCL warrants DLP televisions, h-_cludingthe ]amp ur/its car_tained therein.

sold and used for commercial purposes as fo,ows: all parts are warranted against defects in matedab or workmanship for a period of ninety (90} days after the date of original purchase DURING THiS PERIOD, TCL WILL,

AT TCL'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A

NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE

SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN }O0 KILOMETERS OF AN

AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.

and Product Registration

Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating this DLP television

Register your product online at www.toshibaoca

as soon as possible By registering your product you will enable TCL bring you new products specifically designed to meet yoLu needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required ur_derthe Consumer Product

Safety Act. Failureto register your product does not diminish your warranty

Ynur RespensibiJity

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1] You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of pLucbase

(2] All warlanty sep/icing of this DLP television must be pedormed by an

Authorized FCL Service Depot.

(3} These warlanties from TCL are effective only if the DLP television is purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL deabr and operated in

Canada

(4} Labor eharges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls, and installation or repair of anterg]a systea/s are not covered by these warranties, Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility

(5} Warranties extend only to defects in materials or wol-kmansbip as limited above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the television or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightrfing or fiuctuatior_s in electrie powe0, hT/proper irlstallation, imploper maintenance, or use in violation of instructior/s furnished by TCL: use or malfunction through shmlltar_eous use of this product and connected equipment: or to units that have been modified or bad the serial number removed, akered.

defaced, or _endered illegible

Now to Obtain Warranty Services

Ill after following aHof the operating instructbns in this manual and cheek[rig the "lroublesbooting" section, you find that service is needed:

(1} ]o find the nearest TCL Autbonzed Service Depot. visit TCL's web site at

WWWotOShiba.cao

(2] Present your bill of sale or other proof of purehase to the Autbodzed

Service Depot

For additiona_ information, visit TCL's web site:

www.toshiba.ca

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF

CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA

AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE

AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,

AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT

TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT

SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF

RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE

THIS PRODUCT].

No persor/, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modity, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever

The time within which action must be commenced to enforee any obligation of TCL arising under this warranty or under any law of Canada or of any plovince thereof is hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the detect. This limitation does not apply to in@lied warrarlties arising urlder the law of any province of Canada

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU

MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM

PROVINCE TO PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF

CANADA DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN

IMPLIED WARRANTY, LIMITATIONS ON THE TiME WITHIN WHICH AN

ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF

INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE

ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU

UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

0804

Copyright @ 2004 tOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

103

HM94(E}098-105(11-App) 103

÷

8/31/(34,12:00 PM r

÷

÷

104

HM94(E)098 105(11-App) 104

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:00 PM

F

HM94(E)098-105(11-App) 105

Copyright @?2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.

8/31/04,12:00 PM

105

[

÷

A

A/V receiver connection ........................................................

EFGHJJ

B

Blocking channels ....................................................................

O

Cable box connection ......................................................

G-LINK connection .................................................................

HDMI connection ....................................................................

Camcorder connection ...........................................................

Channel Number buttons .....................................................

Channel programming:

Automatic programming ..................................................

Installation, care, and service .......................................

Installation, setup ........................................................................

Integrated digital tuning ...........................................................

Color temperature ....................................................................

Connecting devices ..........................................................

Component video cables ......................................................

Component video (CotorStream _} ..............................

CrystalScan HDSC ......................................................................

B

Device connections ..........................................................

L

Lamp unit replacement ................................................

Language selection .................................................................

Channels, blocking .............................................................

Enable rating blocking ......................................................

Double-window POP feature ...............................................

DTV receiver connection .......................................................

Unlocking programs temporarily ..................................

÷

HM94(E)106

106

106

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.

All rights reserved.

÷

8/31/04,12:09 PM r

M

S

Safety, care, instalIation, and service .............................

Satellite receiver connection ...............................................

SD (Secure DigitaP'} memory' cards ................................

OPQ

Picture adjustments:

Color temperature ...............................................................

Picture-out-picture (POP}:

Sound quality adjustments ...................................................

Specifications ...........................................................................

T

TheaterNeP' DEVICE and CONTROL buttons .............45

TheaterNet connection ..........................................................

R

Remote control:

Battery' installation ..............................................................

Operational feature reset .................................................

Troubleshooting .................................................................

V

V-Chip bIocking (Locks menu) ....................................

VCR connection .................................................................

W

÷

HM94(E)106-107(Index)

1o7

Copyri9ht © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOBATION, All ri9hts reserved,

÷

8/31/04,12:09 PM

107

F

TOSH|BA A_ER|CA CONSUMER

HEAD OmCE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, USA.

NATIONAL SERVICEDMSJON:1420 B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, USA

PRODUCTSj

TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD,

HEAD OFFICE:191 McNABB STREEL MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, DANADA TEL: (905} 470 5/#00

SERVICECENTERS:

TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET,MARKEJAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA TEL: (905) 470 5400

MONTREAL: 18O5OTRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA TEL: (51a) 390-7766

VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOODWAY, RICHMOND, BC, V6W lJ5, CANADA TEL: (60a) 303 2500

MANUFACTURED BY

TOgNJBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCT5_

L,L,C,

ColorStream, FST PURE StabieSound, and TheaterWkte are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, LLC

CabbCiear, GameThner, SurfLock Symbio, arid TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Plx>ducts,LLC

SmartMedia is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation

L,L,C,

HM94(E)108

PRINTEDIN USA

(o4q 0 (RO

108

Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.

All rights reserved,

_ 11/3/04,10:40 AM r

÷

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement